WO2007037548A1 - Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof - Google Patents

Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2007037548A1
WO2007037548A1 PCT/JP2006/320033 JP2006320033W WO2007037548A1 WO 2007037548 A1 WO2007037548 A1 WO 2007037548A1 JP 2006320033 W JP2006320033 W JP 2006320033W WO 2007037548 A1 WO2007037548 A1 WO 2007037548A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
ink
supply
ink cartridge
case
ambient air
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2006/320033
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2007037548A9 (en
Inventor
Shingo Hattori
Tomohiro Kanbe
Toyonori Sasaki
Original Assignee
Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2005284646A external-priority patent/JP4539517B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2006064974A external-priority patent/JP4400586B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2006081806A external-priority patent/JP4479684B2/en
Application filed by Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority to CN2006800065599A priority Critical patent/CN101132926B/en
Publication of WO2007037548A1 publication Critical patent/WO2007037548A1/en
Publication of WO2007037548A9 publication Critical patent/WO2007037548A9/en

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/1752Mounting within the printer
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17506Refilling of the cartridge
    • B41J2/17509Whilst mounted in the printer
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17513Inner structure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17503Ink cartridges
    • B41J2/17553Outer structure
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B41PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
    • B41JTYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
    • B41J2/00Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
    • B41J2/005Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
    • B41J2/01Ink jet
    • B41J2/17Ink jet characterised by ink handling
    • B41J2/175Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
    • B41J2/17596Ink pumps, ink valves

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an ink cartridge and inkjet record more specifically, to an ink cartridge and inkjet recording apparatus which c a state in which the ink cartridge is mounted, and can prevent the mk cartrid damaged Background Art
  • an inkjet p ⁇ nter in which containers are inserted and mounted in the horizontal direction is known exit is formed on a front-end side surface of the ink container in the directio a fluid inlet port corresponding to the tower-shaped ink exit is formed on a surface of the inkjet printer so as to project toward the ink container Whe is inserted and mounted in the horizontal direction to a predetermined po printer, the tower-shaped ink exit and the fluid inlet port are connected, which the ink in the ink container can be supplied to the inkjet printer is ach
  • an ink cartridge provided w for blocking by a resilient force of a coil spring a flow path in an ink supply ink in the ink cartridge outward spring is known
  • the valve device include opening and closing a supply port of the ink supply part, and the ink flow urging the valve body by the coil sp ⁇ ng in the direction of closing the s other hand, opening of the ink flow path is achieved by a supply needle pro type recording apparatus entering into the supply port and pushing the val mk cartridge is mounted
  • Patent Document 1 JP-A-2003-25608 (Fig l, Fig 7, etc ) case in which the ink cartridge is mounted in the horizontal direction, there the ink cartridge is detached due to the urging force of the coil spring, cartridge cannot be maintained in a stable state
  • the ink cartridge which is mounted in the horiz structure may be conceivable in which a fixing mechanism for fixing the i mounted state is provided thereby fixing the ink cartridge at the mounted po since the fixing mechanism may be fixed by an engagement with a surface so as to be capable of resisting the urging force of the coil spring, a loa surface of the ink cartridge, thereby damaging the ink cartridge unless the cartridge itself is increased to some extent Disclosure of the Invention
  • an object o provide an ink cartridge and an lnkjet recording apparatus which can stably in which the ink cartridge is mounted and can prevent the ink cartridg damaged
  • the ink supply part having the second op entrance of the extracting member on the front side surface in the direction accommodating chamber is provided, and the second opening of the ink sup and closed by the supply valve mechanism
  • the supply valve mecha supply valve member and the supply urging member, and the supply valve by the supply urging member in the direction of closing the second openi flow path is closed Provided on the back surface of the ink cartridge on t the pressing member in the state in which the ink cartridge is stored in t chamber
  • the urging force of the supply urging member is adapted to resilient force of the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion, the f direction of detaching the ink cartridge from the accommodating chamber b hence the ink cartridge might be detached by pressing the door
  • the for fixing the ink cartridge is provided without providing the pressing mechanism is engaged with and hence fixes the surface of the ink cartridge urging force of the supply urging member Therefore, a load is applied t and hence the ink cartridge itself may become damaged
  • the ink cartridge is retai force of the pressing member, and hence the ink cartridge is prevented fro the accommodating chamber, so that stable storage and retention are achiev cartridge can be retained by the resilient force of the pressing member, cartridge itself can be prevented in comparison with the case in which t fixed by the fixing mechanism
  • the ink supply part is provided at a le center position of the front side surface, and the pressed portion is provide than the center position of the back surface and higher than a position co ink supply part in the vertical direction of the back surface
  • t of the door is provided on the lower side of the accommodating chamber, t closes the door member by operating the distal end of the door Therefore, portion is provided on the upper side of the back surface, a working poin member presses the ink cartridge comes apart from the axis of rotation of the user is required to apply a large force to close the door member O not required for operating the door, and the ink cartridge can be main predetermined position
  • the atmospheric air introduci third opening for introducing atmospheric air into the ink storage chamber front side surface, and the third opening of the atmospheric air introducing closed by the atmospheric air valve mechanism The atmospheric air includes the atmospheric air valve member and the atmospheric air urging atmospheric air valve member is urged by the atmospheric air urging mem of closing the third opemng, and hence the flow path of the atmosphe ⁇ c ai the resultant urging force of the urging force of the supply urging mem force of the atmospheric air urging member is adapted to be smaller than th the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion ⁇ even when th introducing part is provided with the valve mechanism, the ink cartri retained
  • the pressing member abuts against the presse projecting ends of the ink supply part and the atmospheric air introducing p distal end of the accommodating chamber Therefore, since the ink cartr two points on the distal end and one point on the near side, the ink cartrid further stably
  • the irradiated portion to which the the optical sensor is irradiated when the ink cartridge is mounted to th apparatus is provided on the front side surface between the ink sup atmospheric air introducing part, and the irradiated portion is located i projecting ends of the ink supply part and the atmospheric air introd mounting direction Therefore, since the irradiated portion does not hit ag According to the inkjet recording apparatus, when the ink cartridge in the accommodating chamber, a state in which the ink can be extr extracting member is achieved by the extracting member entering into pressing the supply valve member
  • the door is provided on the accom with the axis of rotation at the lower side thereof, and the door is provided member for pressing the back surface of the ink cartridge When 7 the doo posture, the second opening for the ink cartridge is closed, and hence t retained in the state in which the back surface of the ink cartridge is press member Since the resilient force of the pressing member is adapted to urging force of the supply urging member for urging the supply valve cartridge is
  • FiG 9 IS a diagram showing the protector, where (a) is a top-surface diagra FiG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capacity black FiG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is a fro reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reservoir element
  • FlG 15 IS a diagram showing the supply path formation part, where (a) is a summary of the supply path formation part (a side view of the fr cross-sectional diagram showing the supply path formation part in the XVb-XVb line, (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the been reduced, and (d) is a diagram showing the completion of the in FiG 16 IS a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, where diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path formation par showing the ambient air path formation part in Figure 16(a) alon perspective, and (c) is a diagram showing the ambient air path forma
  • FiG 17 IS a diagram showing the injection path formation part, where showing a summary of the injection path formation part, and (b) i diagram of the injection path formation part in Figure 17(a) along line FiG 18 IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) is a di summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a cross-sectional diagra part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIb-XVIIIb line, and (c) is a cross- of the detection part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line
  • FlG 19 is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a front view of t
  • (b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in Figure 19(a) along perspective FiG 20 is a diagram showing one part of the ink reservoir element, wher showing the side of the ink reservoir element, (b) is a diagram showi is a diagram showing the supply cap, where (a) is a diagram show supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surface of the supply along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the pl supply cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the supp cross-sectional diagram of the supply cap in Figure 23 (c) along t line is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagram show supply joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the su diagram showing the bottom surface of the supply joint, and (d) i diagram of the supply joint in Figure 24(b) along the XXIVd-XXIV is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagram s the supply valve, (b) is a diagram
  • XXVId-XXVId line is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagram sh the supply slider, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the supply sli along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the the supply slider, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the
  • (e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply slider in Figure check valve
  • (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the ch diagram showing the bottom surface of the check valve
  • (c) i diagram of the check valve in Figure 29(a) along the XXIXd-XXIX is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram showing th (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the cover, (c) is a dia bottom surface of the cover, and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram of t
  • FIG. 30(b) along the XXXd-XXXd line IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the ambien 31 (a) along the arrow XXXIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing of the ambient air cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface cap, and (e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in the XXXIe-XXXIe line is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) is a diagram of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air joint in Figure
  • XXXIId-XXXIId line IS a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showing the bottom surf air valve is a partial cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism have been asse supply unit and the ambient air intake unit is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes prior to welding is a diagram showing the welding processes for the film, where injection process FIG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, wher showing the process to sandwich the frame part by the case, an showing the welding process to weld the case FiG 39 IS a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are p shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagram showing the pr protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showing the process to packag using the packaging unit
  • FiG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink cartridge to device
  • FiG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartridge has be multifunction device
  • FIG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm correspondin ink remaimng within the ink reservoir chamber, where (a) shows there is ink remaining, and (b) shows the state in which there is no in
  • FIG 44 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong orientation
  • FIG 45 is a diagram showing the method of removing the ink cartridg recording device
  • FiG 46 is a diagram showing the front perspective of the ink cartridge and t is removed from the multifunction device
  • FiG 47 is a diagram showing the structure to reduce adherence of the ink surface of the detection part of the ink cartridge, where (a) shows the ink cartridge has been removed from the refill unit, (b) is a dia surface on which the detection part is formed on the ink cartridge, a i
  • FiG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartridge acc example of embodiment
  • FiG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the iiik reserv
  • FiG 64 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to the ele embodiment
  • FiG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of t FiG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of t
  • FIG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of th Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
  • Figure 1 is an oblique view showing multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 of the present invention is i
  • Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction device 1, a is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 Multifunction device 1
  • printer part 11 and scanner part 12 have various functions such as a printer function, scanner function, c facsimile function
  • Multifunction device 1 is primarily connected to a computer (external in the figure), and it records images or documents to recording paper us medium based on image data or document data sent from this computer M
  • 1 can also be connected to an external device such as a digital camera (no figure) such that it records image data outputted from the digital camera t
  • multifunction device 1 can communicate figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is equipped at the base of t multifunction device 1
  • Refill unit 13 has a compact design and is config cartridge 14 can be easily replaced, and this will be described in detail belo
  • Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which functions a Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the upper part of 15 (top of figure 1)
  • Document cover 16 is equipped with automatic docu Auto Document Feeder, called “ADF” hereafter) 17, and it is attached t document bed 15 (back side of Figure 1) using a hmge such that it can be closed Therefore, document cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating i arrow A with respect to document bed 15
  • ADF automatic docu Auto Document Feeder
  • Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illustr between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is equipped with unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside A document is placed b cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, and the image reading unit reads document by moving along the contact glass sheet from the bottom of the co
  • Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is con can consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of documents from do paper ejection tray 19 Moreover, ADF 17 has a known structure, so its d will be omitted In this embodiment, a configuration that is not equipped also be used In this configuration, document cover 16 is opened by the us are placed on the contact glass sheet
  • Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that has an inkj (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configured as an inkjet recording d 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on the front side of multifunction devic Moreover, opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening 21 of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure 1) is provided on t refill unit 13 (front of Figure 1) Opening/closing cover 20 is configured freely rotated between a position in which it exposes refill unit 13 through position in which it closes opening 21 and houses refill unit 13 by folding (front direction in Figure 1)
  • Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifunctio paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned inside this openi the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged is illustrated) After t that is sent from the paper feed tray is sent to the back side, it is sent to the to the front side, and images are recorded onto the recording paper while t is fed The recording paper is then discharged to a paper ejection tray (no figure) that is provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside openi
  • Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front surface sid device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure 1)
  • This operation panel part for the purpose of performing the operations of printer part 11 and sca is equipped with various operation keys 31-34 and liquid crystal display pa operation keys 31-34 arranged on operation panel 30 are connected to a c control circuit board, not illustrated in the figure) used as a control mea major functions through flat cables not illustrated in the Figure
  • the control device pro from receiver 2 described above and controls the operation of multifunction in cases in which a device such as a personal computer is connected to multi the control device controls the operation of multifunction device 1 based o from this personal computer in addition to the instructions from operation pa
  • refill unit 13 is primarily equipped with case cartridges 14 are inserted and removed, and door 41, which is connected to 40 is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped on the whole, an Figure 4, accommodating chambers 50 (housing parts) that house and hol are partitioned and formed on the inside
  • accommodating chambers 50 house and hol are partitioned and formed on the inside
  • c accommodating chambers 50, and four ink cartridges 14 are inserted into each accommodating chamber 50
  • the inner wall surface shape of eac chamber 50 is formed such that it demarcates space corresponding to the o cartridge 14, and when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is h without rattling
  • case 40 is equipped with bottom plate part 4 43 that are provided on the left and right sides of this bottom plate part 42 on the back left side is not illustrated in Figure 2), and ceiling plate part 44 such that it spans the space between each side plate part 43, and the inside chambers 50 is further equipped with partition wall parts 47 (see Figure each accommodating chamber 50
  • the number of these partition wall pa determined by the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the they are arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 in t
  • partition walls 47 are formed in a rib shape pro and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44
  • parti ink cartridges 14 is formed on needle forming member 48 based on t cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50 of case 40
  • needle 49 extends along the direction of ope and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installation direction) in needle forming member 48 is engaged with cutout part 40a
  • this needle 49 is inserted into i (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, and an ink supply path is formed as sup Figure 22) of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) is pressed
  • Passage 54 which introduces ambient air into ink cartridges 14, is form of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure 5)
  • case 40 which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure 5)
  • protrusion 55 that projects to the ink cartridge 14 side (left si formed on the top of passage 54
  • This protrusion 55 is a guide protrusion case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 described below (see Figure 8) More cartridge 14 is about to be installed upside-down, the upside-down inserti 14 is prevented by this protrusion 55
  • a detailed description of this backwards insertion of ink cartridge 14 is given below
  • a detailed descript structure of ink cartridge 14 is also given below
  • remaining ink detection sensor 57 which of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge 14, is provided and passage 54
  • This remaining ink detection sensor 57 is a transmissive accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detec connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stored in ea is constantly monitored by this control device
  • Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves the ri Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm mechanism 44b attached between swing arm mechanism 44b and ceiling plate' part 4 mechanism 44b is always elastically biased in the direction of door 41 Figure 2, left side of Figures 3-5) Swing arm mechanism 44b is configured that project into case 40 (accommodating chamber 50) engage with latch p (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, for example, in the state in which it is el is therefore possible to reliably hold ink cartridge 14 that is installed in case
  • Opening 45 is provided on the front surface of case 40 (insertion hole cartridge 14 is installed) This opening 45 is provided on each of th chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating chamber 50 is succ inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four ink cartridges 14 are respec and removed from each accommodating chamber 50 through openings 45
  • Door 41 opens and closes opemng 45, and is provided on each openin of door 41 switches between a position in which it closes opemng 45 (bl with the 1 st , 3 rd and 4 th door 41 from the back in figure 2 and a position opening 45 (open position), as with the 2 nd door 41 from the back left opening 45 can thereby be opened and closed
  • a position in which it closes opemng 45 (bl with the 1 st , 3 rd and 4 th door 41 from the back in figure 2
  • a position opening 45 open position
  • Rotating shaft part 64 which is supp part of the front surface of case 40, is formed on the bottom end of d (bottom side end in Figure 6)
  • bearing part 42a is formed o bottom plate part 42 of case 40 (see Figures 2, 3, and 4), and rotating sh into this bearing part 42a such that it can rotate freely As a result, door close opening 45 by standing up or open opening 45 by folding over
  • Pullout member 65 which is formed as a unit with door main body 60, bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout member 65 is roughly form and it has extension part 65a and curved part 65b Extension part 65a is suc on the bottom end of door main body 60 (rotating shaft part 64), and c successively provided forming an approximately 90° angle with extension p
  • part 65b projects even further upwards than installation surface 51 o chamber 50 (bottom surface inside accommodating chamber 50 that make bottom surface of ink cartridge 14, see Figure 4)
  • Door main body 60 rotat shaft part 64 as a rotational center, and as a result, pullout member 65 th L-shape also rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational cente changes to the open position (state illustrated in Figure 3), curved part 65b 65 rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational center
  • rotation of curved part 65b, outer wall surface 65c changes from a state roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly hori illustrated in Figure 3)
  • Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides ink installation surface 51 mside accommodating chamber 50 m the state in w width
  • Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member 61 su to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodating part 60a, in housed, is provided on door main body 60
  • Claw accommodating part 60a a groove that extends in a direction that is roughly perpendicular to the lon of door mam body 60 (vertical direction in Figure 6)
  • Claw 61a is accommodating part 60a such that it can slide freely, so pressing retain supported such that it can advance and retreat in a direction that is pe longitudinal direction of door mam body 60
  • pressing ret can change positions between a projected position in which it is raised from of door main body 60 (state illustrated in Figure 3) and a retreated positi retreated from the projected position to the side of door main body 60 ( Figure 4)
  • coil spring 66 is placed between pressing retaimng m main body 60 Therefore, pressing retaining member 61 is elastically bia always in the projected position
  • pressing retaining member 61 is formed in the sh while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 61 (surface that the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when door 41 is in the blocked positio r
  • ink cartridge 14 of this embod with ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surfac surface that makes contact with pressing retaining member 61, and this in embodiment is set such that it is larger than the elastic force of the valve supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130
  • ink on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on the top part in the ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating chamber 50, so pressing ret presses against a position that is relatively close to the center position in th of ink cartridge 14 Therefore, in comparison to the case in which it presse top or bottom end of ink cartridge 14, the direction in which the momentu ink cartridge 14 can be stabilized and held
  • Door lock member 62 is attached to the top end of door main unit 60 ( in Figure 6)
  • Door lock member 62 has main shaft part 62a, key part 62b t direction of the mside of case 40 continuing from the upper end of main sh side of Figure 6), and seat part 62c (contact part) that projects in the directio case 40 continuing from the lower end of mam shaft part 62a (lower side of
  • Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and retr direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical direction in Figure extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door main body 60 Slide extends in the vertical direction, is provided on main shaft part 62a of doo Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 is inserted into this slide groove 6 member 62 is configured such that it can freely slide up and down
  • Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key part 62b 62a
  • claw 62e accommodating part 60c provided on door main body 60
  • This claw accom is configured from a groove that extends to exactly a prescribed length in th Therefore, when door lock member 62 slides upward or downward, claw lock member 62 is in the position in which it projects upward from the main body 60
  • door lock member 62 slides downward with respect 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the bottom edge of the inside wa accommodating part 60c
  • door lock member 62 is in the position in whic inside of door main body 60
  • Coil spring 67 (elastic member) is placed between door lock member body 60 Therefore, door lock member 62 is elastically biased such that upward from door main body 60 - in other words,
  • the top surface of key part 62b of door lock member 62 is a sloped downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open position to the the top surface of door lock member 62 makes contact with the top edge of 40, and when door 41 is rotated towards the blocked position, door lock me the inside of door main body 60 as it is relatively pressed against the top e When door 41 then completely changes to the blocked position, door loc again projects from door main body 60, and key part 62b engages with th 40
  • Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release lev time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63 a is fitted, is prov body 60 Because supporting pin 63 a is fitted into this pm support hole 6Oe, 63 is configured such that it can rotate freely around the rotational center 63 a Specifically, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can be displaced between a position that is roughly parallel to the outer surface of a position in which it is inclined at approximately 45° (degrees) (state of do of Figure 2), and a position in which it is folded over roughly horizontall door 41 from the right side of Figure 2) by moving the lever In this specifi of lock release lever 63 when it is housed mside accommodating part 6O "housed position", and the position of lock release lever 63 when lock r inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "neutral position", while t release lever 63 when it is folded over roughly horizontally is defin position"
  • lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, and int is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the position of loc changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provided, when lock release l from the housed position, through the neutral position, and to the folded p member 62 slides from the projected position, through the intermediate p retreated position Put the other way around, when door lock member 62 position, lock release lever 63 is placed in the housed position and door 4 the state in which door lock member 62 makes contact with lock member case 40, lock release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the house the state in which door 41 is closed (state illustrated in Figure 4), loc attempts to further rotate door lock member 62 through interlocking cam pressing downward
  • door lock member 62 is always elastically coil spring 67, so door lock member 62 is not displaced by the action of release lever 63 alone, and door lock member 62 is maintained in the interm
  • lock release lever 63 when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for exam which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates and rotates lock lock release lever 63 is rotated and displaced to the folded position
  • interlocking cam 63b rotates and ch centered on supporting pin 63 a and presses seat part 62c of door lock mem
  • door lock member 62 moves downward in opposition to the e spring 67 and is displaced to the retreated position
  • door lock membe the retreated position the lock of door 41 is released, and this door 41 blocked position to the open position
  • Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil sp rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - in other releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door lock memb position in which it projects most from door main body 60, and lock r forcibly displaced to the housed position
  • door 41 is i lock release lever 63 is in the position in which it
  • Ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be descri to Figures 7 to 13
  • Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of storing ink in a magenta, yellow, and black colored ink is stored in each ink cartridge 1 regard to the structure of each ink cartridge 14, ink cartridge 14 that stores b such that it is slightly thicker than the ink cartridges 14 that store the other is because the demand for black ink is generally the highest and it is quantities and because black ink consists of pigmented inks, while color dyed inks, so when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities o a diagram showing protector 300, and (a) is a top surface view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while (b) is a cross-sectional view of pro line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a)
  • the X-direc longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir e Y-direction indicates the height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink 100), which
  • colored ink cartridge 14 is equipped wit covers roughly the entire body of ink reservoir element 100 that stores ink ( protector 300, which is attached to this case 200 and protects ink reservoir ink cartridge 14 is fed
  • case 200 is formed parallelepiped that contains a pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a that o (cases 1200 and 2200 explained below are the same)
  • case 200, protector 300, and all of the members contained i described below are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal can be burned at the time of disposal
  • resin materials and do not contain metal can be burned at the time of disposal
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipp 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores ink (inner space a including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink supply part 120, which supplies frame part 110 to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), ambient air intak introduces ambient air into frame part 110, detection part 140 (irradiat provided in order to detect the amount of remaining ink stored inside fr 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z-direction)
  • First is a member that covers the bottom side surface of ink reservoir element 1
  • second case element 220 is a member that covers the top side surface of in 100 in Figure 8
  • First and second case members 210 and 220 are made of r are manufactured using injection molding The depths of first and second and 220 (lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z-dire such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such that the su roughly equivalent to the thickness of ink reservoir element 100 As a r between ink reservoir element 100 and the inside surface of case 200 beco becomes narrow), so
  • First case member 210 comprises a plate-shaped part that forms larges vertical wall parts 210b-210e that are provided in roughly orthogonal d directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portions of the plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 210d-210e, the vertical protector 300 side of first case member 210 is 210b, the vertical wall that this vertical wall part 210b is 210c, and the vertical walls that are respecti vertical wall parts 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe Figure 8 is vertical wall part 21Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical w
  • Case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing ink su ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 are formed on vertical first case member 210
  • Case cutout parts 211 and 212 are formed into ro shapes from the edges of vertical wall part 210b, and case cutout part 211 side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ink supply part 120, while ca on the left back side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ambient ai connecting to case cutout part 212 of first case member 210 Because the 212a and 212b are provided, the alignment of ink reservoir element 1 member 210 becomes easy
  • case projecting parts 214a and 214b which project i protector 300 (left front direction and X-direction in Figure 8) from the sur cutout parts 211-213 are formed (vertical wall part 210b), are formed on 210
  • Case projecting parts 214a and 214b are formed on both sides of first in the Y-direction (right front side end and left back side end of Figure sandwich case cutout parts 211 to 213, and the ink supply part 120 side ( Figure 8) is case projecting part 214a, while the ambient air intake part 1 side of Figure 8) is case projecting part 214b
  • Case projecting part 214a h 214a2 which slopes in the direction of case cutout parts 211 to 213 (directi first case member 210) towards the edge from the portion that connects to t of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector 300 direction, in Figure 8)
  • ink cartridge 14 is to be installed into multifunction de 1), it is installed such that case projecting part 214a is on the bottom side case
  • Second case member 220 comp ⁇ ses a plate-shaped part that forms la and vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe that are provided in roughly ort (vertical directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portion of this plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe, the forms the protector 300 side of second case member 220 is 220b, the v placed opposite this vertical wall part 220b is 220c, and the vertical walls th connected to vertical wall parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od side of Figure 8 is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is 22Od)
  • Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure that is roughly s case member 210 As with first case member 210, three case cutout par formed on vertical wall part 220b, and contact groove 221a connected to ca and contact groove 222a connected to case cutout part 222 are also formed 221 and 222 are formed into the same shapes as case cutout parts 211 an member 210 (roughly semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is for shape as case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of case cutou and case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 that slopes in the which rod members 215a-215c fit after passing through in the direction of 210 (Z-direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod members 21 case member 210 are formed
  • first case member 210 and second case ember 22 formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are in the state in w reservoir element 100, roughly circular through-holes that expose a portion 120 to the outside are formed by case cutout parts 211 and 221, whil through-holes that expose a portion of ambient air intake part 130 to the out case cutout parts 212 and 222 Through-holes into which remaining ink d (see Figure 5) can be inserted are formed on both sides of detection part 14 bottom sides in Figure 8, both sides in the Z-direction) by case cutout hole the side wall of detection part 140 Further, a protrusion (“first projectin projecting part”) that contributes to the prevention of ink contamination o prevention of the installation of the cartridge into refill unit 13 in the wron prevention of the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ( part", or “one projecting part”) that cont ⁇ butes to the prevention of th installation in the wrong position together
  • vertical wall parts 21Od, 21Oe, 22Od, and 22Oe (side surface directions (Y-direction) that are orthogonal to longitudinal directio connecting the ⁇ ght back side of Figure 8 and the left front side of Fig Figure 8) are formed into concave shapes, and steps are formed with surfaces 210a and 220a (surfaces) of first and second case members 210 second case members 210 and 220 are welded to these step portions, element 110 is fastened to case 200 Regarding these step portions, the st side of ink supply part 120 (right front side of Figure 8) are first case wel 226, and the step portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left b 8) are second case welded parts 217 and 227
  • longitudinal direction B of first and sec 210 and 220 refers to the longitudin cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction or ink reservoir element 100, an direction of case 200
  • First case welded part 226 is connected to case projecting part 224a in the s the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, it has concave part 226a, whi concave shape in the direction of the inside of second case member 220, an 226b that engages with pullout member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when removed from refill unit 13 (see Figure 1)
  • Concave part 226a is a regio oscillating range when pullout member 65 rotates Case welded part 227 h engagement part 226b, and latch part 227a of second case member 220, a first case member 210
  • protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 an diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross-sectional vie through line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a)
  • Protector 300 is a member for protecti 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in particular, of ink reservoir elem cartridge 14 is shipped
  • Protector 300 is made from a resin material and is injection molding
  • protector through-hole 310 is formed on location corresponding to the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left back s the bottom surface This is because valve open part 721a for operating am (see Figure 33) projects outward from ambient air intake part 130, and prot 310 is formed in order to protect this valve open part 721a
  • first protector fitting part 3 into the fitting groove formed by case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 formed in the vicinity of the end of the side of protector through-hole 31 (left side in Figure 9(a)
  • First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends in a dir direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (vertical 9(a), X-direction), and consists of protector vertical wall 321 provided fro of protector 300 and two protector vertical walls 322 that are connected to t opposite side as protector through-hole 310 from protector vertical wall Figure 9(a))
  • each protector vertical wall 32 part formed parallel to protector vertical wall 321 from the top end of fir part 320 (top side end in Figure 9(b)) and a bottom part connected to the sid 300 from a roughly intermediate position in the projecting direction of fir part 320 (upward in Figure 9(b), X-direction), and they have steps
  • protector vertical wall 321 and the top of protector ve inserted into the fitting groove
  • first protector fitting part 320 is inser groove, it is inserted as it is restricted by both ends of protector vertica extends in the Z-direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C (Y-directi protector vertical wall 322 in longitudinal direction C
  • first protect is formed with roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by c 214b2 and 224b2 (see Figure 8)
  • the attachment of protector 300 takes tim protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the fitting gr of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot be determined
  • the installation properties of improved, and mistaken installation can be prevented
  • protruding parts 330al and 330bl, whi removed as second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically def direction
  • black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to Figures 10 is an oblique view that shows the external appearance of black ink cartr is an exploded oblique view of black ink cartridge 14
  • black ink cartridge 14 is config external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z-direction) is la colored ink cartridges 14
  • second case member 220 which con is identical to second case member 220 for colored ink, and first case me constitutes case 1200, is formed such that it is thicker (the length in the Z than first case member 210 for colored ink Ink reservoir element 100 has to store black ink, so it is configured with the same shape as colored ink res and uses the same parts
  • protector 1300 is formed corresponding it is formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z-direction) t Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regard to first case descriptions of second case member 220, ink reservoir element 100, and p be omitted here Only the depth of first case member 1210 (the thickness of (length of Z-direction) in Figure 11) the differs from that of first case me rest of its configuration is the same, so it detailed description will be omitte As illustrated in Figure 1
  • rib 1218 is formed on roughly the entire inside surface of first (roughly the entire largest surface 1210a) This rib 1218 projects in the Z the side of ink reservoir element 100 to the degree that the external pr member 1210 is enlarged with respect to first case member 210 (differ vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first case member 210 and vertical w 121Oe of first case member 1210) Because this rib 1218 is provided, the s between ink reservoir element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is th maintain the strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
  • black ink cartridge 14 l colored ink cartridge 14 it is possible to differentiate between black ink other ink cartridges 14 Black is a darker color than other colors, so it is not be mistakenly loaded into refill unit 13 and used
  • accommodating chamber 5 13 is formed according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink ca installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colored ink ca
  • first case member 1210 member 220 the thicknesses of first case member 1210 member 220 in the vertical direction (Z-direction) differ, so ink supply par supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positioned in positions shifte '
  • first case member 2210 whi 2200, rib 1218 of first case member 1210 for black ink is simply rem reservoir element 2100 is simply thickened such that the capacity increas colored and black ink reservoir element 100 Therefore, detailed description black ink cartridge 14 will be omitted here
  • the reference numeral 2000 is adde numerals attached to colored ink cartridge 14
  • the thicknesses of first case second case member 2220 in the vertical direction (Z-direction) are roughly supply part 2120, ambient air supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 ar center position in the vertical direction
  • refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 is configured such with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house cored ink cartridge accommodating chamber 50 that selectively houses black ink cartridge 14 black ink cartridge 14 (the inner space of this accommodating chambe corresponding to large-capacity black ink cartridge 14)
  • the printing using only black ink is generally higher than that of color printing of multifunction device 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that it multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may be prov infrequently use text printing
  • ink cartridge 14 ink reservoir element 100
  • ink reservoir element 100 are horizontal directions, which ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom part si intake part 130 is positioned on the ceiling side
  • Ink reservoir element 21 reservoir element 100 only with regard to its thickness (length in the detailed description will be omitted here
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipped wi ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink di and film 160 Moreover, ink reservoir element 100 is configured roughly as The pair of surfaces that constitute the largest area of this hexahedron is the and the back surface side of ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Fi configured with approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side w four directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 are par largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded into case 200 Mo welded to both the front surface side and the back surface side of fram thickness of ink reservoir element 100 (length in the Z-direction), which is shape, can be reduced in comparison to the case in which both sides are materials
  • frame part 110 will be described in detail
  • Frame part 110 is injection molding using a resin material, and it has translucence because translucent (or transparent) This is because, as described below, light th light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 positioned detection part 140 is transmitted
  • outer circumference welded part 400a are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), and the fron (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded part 400a is the welded part) on the periphery of first opening 112a Film 160 is welded to this wel ultrasonic welding As illustrated in Figure 14(b), outer circumference welded part 400b,
  • outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b consti chamber 111 m which ink is stored
  • the region on the front surface side il 14(a) is first chamber Il ia of ink reservoir chamber 111, and the region o side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second chamber 111b of ink reserv
  • outer circumference welded part 400a illustrated in Figure 14( 112a of frame part 110, and outer circumference welded part 400b illustrat is second opening 112b of frame part 110
  • Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 420 (see 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 and supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside, ambient air communicating passage
  • link forming part 440 partitions first chamber I lia and second ch reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in the figure), that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a extends, and vi illustrated in the figure), in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumf 400b extends, and extends in a plane parallel to these virtual planes
  • This 440 will be described in detail, m a later process Ambient air passage fo formed such that it is positioned only on the front surface side of frame par chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111), and it is roughly partitioned which extends parallel to these planes between a portion of outer circumfe 400a and inner circumference welded part 412a and virtual planes R and S communicating passage forming part 430 will be described
  • thin plate-shaped pr formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Figure 14(a) a Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top part of Figure 14( Figure 14(b)), and through-holes 460a to 460c, into which rod members Figure 8) of first case member 210 described above are inserted, are protruding parts positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circ part 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
  • Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path formi consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (see Figure 8, left/right directio
  • Inner circumference welded part 412a forms one side wall (vertical wa connection passage 433, which will be described below, in ambient a passage forming part 430, and it consists of a downward-sloping vertical w direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110
  • circumference welded part 413a is provided in the vicinity of ambient air i it consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, and a vertical wall that extends wall in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B (vertical direction in Figure 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are Inner circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal directi 110, a vertical wall
  • inner circumference welded p inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumference welded part formed with roughly the same shapes as inner circumference welded pa circumference welded parts 413a to 417a described above and in position those of inner circumference welded part 411a and inner circumference we 417a, and only inner circumference welded part 412b is formed with a diffe different position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a
  • Mo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are positi virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circumference wel film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane S)
  • Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumference which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumference wel direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame par and inner circumference welded part 412b2, which likewise consists of a extends from outer circumference welded part 400b in a direction that is r corresponding to the back surface side of this ambient air communicatin part 430 Moreover, as with the front surface side, inner circumference we 417b become free ends and are spread around on the back surface side of well (scattered in multiple units), so they efficiently reduce the inhibition suppressing the generation of slack in film 160
  • inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 41 a spread-out orientation (scattered in multiple units), in the case in which from a flexible resin material, it is possible to restrict case defor circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b even if the ca side of ink reservoir element 100 As a result, it is possible to prevent the and the damage of film 160 Further, outer circumference welded parts 4 inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are fo walls that are provided on the front surface side or the back surface s complex dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection-mol possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420
  • Figure 15 (a) is a d the outline of supply path forming part 420 (diagram of the back surface 110)
  • Figure 15(b) is a diagram that shows a cross-sectional view of supply 420 through line XVb-XVb in Figure 15 (a)
  • Figure 15(c) is a diagram that which the amount of remaining ink has decreased
  • Figure 15(d) is a d the state in which the supply of ink has been completed
  • supply path forming part 420 is primar first supply communicating hole 421, which communicates with ink suppl partition wall 422, which is formed into a roughly triangular frame when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 15(a) such that it enclose into a concave shape (stepped shape), plate part 428, which extends from o welded part 400b and supply partition wall 422 and extends parallel to virt between the planes, arm sandwiching part 425, which is provided on the fr 428 and has sensor arm 470 ("displacement member", see Figure 19) th rotating member (desc ⁇ bed below), and inner circumference welded pa provided in the direction of detection part 140 (see Figure 14(b)) from thi part 425 Moreover, film 160 is welded to supply partition wall 422, and part is positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of o welded part 400b (virtual plane S) The space enclosed by supply partition part 427 is ink supply chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that supply part
  • supply partition wall 422 is formed su illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path))
  • ink flow path D through which ink inside frame part 110 is sup part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c) and 15(d)
  • recessed space 424a is the inside of ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partitio filled with ink
  • ink fil supply chamber 426 so even if liquid surface I of the ink drops b communicating hole 421, the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 12 supply communicating hole 423
  • ink supply par cylind ⁇ cally shaped, as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as desc ⁇ bed below, supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed inside ink supply e shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) is inserted into first supp hole 421
  • ambient air communicating passage fo primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating chamber 431, whi roughly rectangular parallelepiped that communicates with ambient air second ambient air communicating chamber 432, which is formed into a r parallelepiped that communicates with ink reservoir chamber 111, and amb passage 433, which communicates with first ambient air communicating second ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surfa film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a surfac in virtual plane R)
  • first ambient air communicating passage comm
  • First ambient air communicating hole 434 which communicates with part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b that opposes first su ambient air communicating chamber 431 (second surface 437b is the surfac described above)
  • second ambient air communicating chamber 432 s communicating hole 435, which communicates with first chamber Ili chamber 111, is formed on the side of first surface 437a
  • third ambient hole 436 which communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoi formed on second surface 437b (plate part 438)
  • First ambient air communi formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating chamb of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side in Figure 16), and communica is formed on side wall surface 432a of second ambient air communicating c
  • these communicating openings 433a and 433b have opening areas tha smaller than the side wall areas of first ambient air communicating chamb ambient air communicating chamber 432 (side wall surfaces 431a an communicating openings 433a and 433b are formed) Because a part hav introduces ambient air with extremely
  • ambient air connection passage 433 slope direction of second ambient air communicating chamber 432 from communicating chamber 431 Because ambient air connection passage 433 the device is in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1, ink that has penetrated into ambient air connection naturally returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 due to gravity More cross-sectional area of ambient air connection passage 433 is made small, ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection p reduced
  • ambient air connection passage 433 slopes dow penetrates into the passage, the ink is returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 of meniscuses can be substantially prevented
  • ambient air connecti formed as a result of the welding of film 160 so at least one of the surfaces can be deformed by bending
  • ambient air connectio configured such that its cross-sectional area changes easily Therefore, e forms, the meniscus can be easily broken due to the bending and deformatio so ambient air
  • case 200 of ink cartridge 14 is formed into a cubic shape c largest surfaces that oppose one another, so when this is loaded onto a flat b assume one of two loading positions in which one of largest surfaces 210a a lower surface (bottom surface)
  • ambient air intake part 130 is side surface of case 200, but, as described below, it is difficult for ink to lea communicating passage forming part 430 in either of the positions
  • Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air comm forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading positions
  • ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connecti positioned on the lower side (the side of first chamber U 1 a of frame part 11 and first surface 437a is the lower side)
  • Figure 16(c) shows the cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positi side (the side of second chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side a 437b is the lower side)
  • the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 passes throug air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air communicating chamber into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
  • connection passage 433 communicates through communicating opening markedly smaller area than the side surface of second ambient air comm prevented
  • first ambient air communicating ch ambient air communicating chamber 432 by configuring first ambient air communicating ch ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient air connection described above and establishing the opening position of first ambient air co 434 and the opemng position of communicating opening 433b in symmetrical to ambient air connection passage 433, it is possible to prevent from ambient air intake part 130 Further, by making the cross-sectional a connection part 433 small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink flow of ink into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
  • link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Figure 14 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 and ink dispensing reservoir chamber 111, and it is formed in roughly the center positio chamber 111 Therefore, link forming part 440 connects two locations that 110, so it is also a reinforcement member that maintains the strength of fra forming part 440 is also a divider plate that divides the chamber such th opening 112a and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the sa (divider plate that divides first chamber I lia and second chamber 111 welded parts 413a, 413b, 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on th second openings 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewe perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back si the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b), here, the direction p page is parallel to the Z-direction) from this ambient air side linking par upper end of the height direction (Y-
  • Linking rib 418a which connects multiple inner circumference welde provided on the side of first opening 112a from link forming part 440, an which connects inner circumference welded part 412b to 417b provided on opening 112b from link forming part 440, are formed on link forming part ribs 418a and 418b are not illustrated in the figure, but they are forme shapes with vertical walls that are lower than inner circumference welded p inner circumference welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these lin 418b are formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result, linking r connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to 4 formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintain the stren part 440 Moreover, linking ribs 418a and 418b are formed into thin- walle are formed with vertical walls that are lower than inner circumference welde and 412b-417b, so it becomes difficult to inhibit the flow of ink
  • FIG. 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage forming part 450 diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passage forming part 450, an cross-sectional view of dispensing passage forming part 450 through lin Figure 17(a)
  • dispensing passage forming part 450 in the position dispensed, it is in the highest part inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and flows downward in the direction of ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta
  • dispensing passage forming part 450 is p partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect to ink rese and second dispensing communicating hole 454, which forms the opemng partition wall 453
  • the opened part of dispensing cylinder part 451 is open formed on the outside end surface of frame part 110, and the surface that op 451a is bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451
  • the regi dispensing partition wall 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow
  • Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference welded 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and s communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in which film 160 is w welded end part of the other inner circumference welded parts 411b to 41 part of dispensing partition wall 453 is positioned on the same virtual plane part of outer circumference welded part 400b
  • ink is dispensed in a state in which second dispensing comm is positioned on top and first dispensing communicating hole 452 is pos (position in which the Y-direction is the horizontal direction in Figure 17( sequentially passes through dispensing cylinder part 451, first dispensing co 452, dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and second dispensing comm and the ink is dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state il 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly fro communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed smoothly without resistance
  • Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinity of detection part 1 a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinity of detection part 140, cross-sectional view of detection part 140 through line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in Figure 18(c) is a cross-sectional diagram of the vicinity of detection part XVIIIC-XVIIIC in Figure 18(a)
  • detection part 140 projects outward fro both sides from bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed 141c that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side ceiling surface, which is formed by ceiling wall 141d that connects to the side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and is positione wall 141a
  • Detection part 140 is also equipped with arm supporting p provided such that it projects upward from the bottom surface formed by and supports sensor arm 470 from below, and vertical wall 143, which is inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part 400b) such arm supporting part 142 and extends in the direction of supply path fo provided in the vicinity of detection part 140
  • part 142 is formed in the center of the width direction of the passage inside and it is arranged such that the end of sensor arm 470 (shielding arm positioned in the center of the passage inside detection part 140 The detail below, but sensor arm 470 rotates according to the amount of ink inside ink 111,
  • bottom wall 141a on the lower part of (lower side in Figure 18(a)) slopes downward in the direction of ink reservo the bottom surface formed by bottom wall 141a mside enclosure 141 also Therefore, ink that is drawn between enclosure part 141 and arm supporti downward in the direction of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or supply path)
  • the junct bottom wall 141a of enclosure 141 and arm supporting part 142 is forme cross-sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), so the capillary force o formed on sloping surface 143 a, which slopes downward in the directi forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Sloping surface 143a cons the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(c), the junction part o and the inside wall of frame part 110 is formed angularly from a cross-se (roughly a right angle), and it is formed
  • sensor arm 470 In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor arm 470 the ceiling surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which opposes bottom wal part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is thus restricted It is the prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of enclosure part 140, and the arm 470 becomes accurate, so it is possible to accurately detect the amount
  • sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 19 Fig that shows sensor arm 470
  • Figure 19(a) is a diagram that shows the front 470
  • Figure 19(b) is a diagram that shows sensor arm 470 from the pe XiXb in Figure 19(a)
  • Sensor arm 470 is a member for detecting the amoun inside ink reservoir chamber 111
  • Sensor arm 470 is manufactured by inject a resm material (polypropylene, for example), and it has light-blocking prop which is attached to frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 4 from this attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to (upward in Figure 19(a)), further extends sloping upward, and blocks the detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57
  • Attachment part 472 is connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
  • Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a which is attached to arm san (see Figure 14) of frame part 110, is formed on attachment part 472
  • Thi 472a is formed with a diameter that is smaller than the inside diameter o part 425 and is larger than the length of the opening of arm sandwiching pa when sensor arm 470 is rotated, it can be operated with little resistance, a sensor arm 470 from arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
  • Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473 a, which extends in roughly perpendicular to balance part 471 (upward in Figure 19(a)), slopi which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473a, and shielding arm p used as a light-blocking part that blocks the range of possible detection detection sensor 57
  • arm part 473 is formed such that it is su than balance part 471 and attachment part 472 This is because, when arm with a thick profile, the scale of detection part 140 is increased, and as a r 14 becomes large and the resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, makes it impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Fur above, when the thickness of detection part 140 increases, the range of dete ink detection sensor 57 widens accordingly and the detection sensitivity expensive, high-performance remaining ink detection sensor with fa properties becomes necessary Therefore, arm part 473 is formed with a thm prevent increases in the scale of ink cartridge 14 and to detect the ac detection part 140 due to the surface tension of the ink and becoming unabl words, because arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 are formed into se the only part that makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2, so the effects of the surface tension of th Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with
  • ink supply part 120 ambient (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom of Figure 20(a)) In other words aligned in the height direction (Y-direction) of ink cartridge 14
  • width t5 of detection part 140 is for shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (opening 6 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustrated in Figure 20 140 is formed such that it is concave in the direction of frame part 1 withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111) with respect to ink su ambient air intake part 130
  • arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned detection part 140
  • the light path of remai sensor 57 (see Figure 5) is opened from the light-blocking state due to the r 473, and the amount of remaining ink can be detected as a result
  • light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a are positione detection part 140 (both left and right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side su part 140 (surfaces on the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and ba Figure 20(b)) form detection surfaces 140a and 140b
  • F detection surfaces 140a and 140b are parallel to the height direction ( cartridge 14 when m the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in other words, the surfaces are vertical When ink adheres to the front detection surfaces 140a and 140b, it is sometimes impossible to detect the a remaimng ink
  • detection part 14 position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adhere to detection pa drips from ink supply part 120
  • ink supply part 120 end surface on which opening 600a of supply cap vertical
  • ink that has adhered to the vicinity of the opening of ink suppl susceptible to the effects of gravity and likely to drop but because det withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink su ink that drops does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adher 140
  • ink reservoir element 100 is primarily brok elements
  • the four parts are frame part 110, ink supply mechanism 500, wh supply part 120, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which constitutes amb 130, and ink dispensing plug 520, which is pressed into dispensing cylind dispensing part 150 (see Figure 17)
  • Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of such as Pulci rubber, and once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part easily removed, and even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is config route of the needle is blocked
  • Ink supply element 116 which is formed in a roughly cylindrical s portion of ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted, and ambient air intake ele formed in a roughly cylindrical shape in which a portion of ambient air inta is inserted, are formed as a unit on frame part 110
  • protruding pa protruding part 116b is not illustrated in the figure
  • protruding parts 117a and 117b protrudin illustrated in the figure
  • protruding parts 117a and 117b which protrude in the direction of the outer circum air intake element 117 in order to fasten ambient intake mechanism 510, arranged on ambient air intake element 117 centered on the axial center of element 117 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions perpendic Figure 21)
  • Figure 22 is of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500
  • Figure 22(b) is an ambient air intake mechanism 510
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is equipped wi which is installed on ink supply element 116, supply joint 610, which is resin material such as rubber into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) of mult (see Figure 1) is inserted, supply valve 620, which blocks the flow path supply joint 610 and the bottom wall make contact, first supply spring 63 inside this supply valve 620 and is made of a resinous elastic material, which covers the open surface of supply valve 620 and can be operated in a which is the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into n of arrow Ol in Figure 22(a), hereafter called the "axial direction Ol of ink 500", regarding this direction, as is clear from Figure 14, ink supply mech parallel to the X-direction when ink cartridge 14 is loaded), second supply is housed inside this supply slider 640 and is formed with the same material shape as those of first supply spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes second supply slider 650 and receives check valve 670, and cover 680, w valve 670 between the valve and this valve seat
  • ambient air intake mechanism 510 is equi air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intake element 117, ambient a is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber, ambient air valve 720, flow path of ink when this ambient air joint 710 and the bottom wall make 22(b), hereafter called the "axial direction 02 of ambient air supply mec clear from Figure 14, ambient air supply 510 becomes parallel to the X- cartridge 14 is loaded), and second ambient air spring 750, which is ambient air slider 740 and is formed with the same material and into the sa of first ambient air spring 730 Ambient air valve 720, first ambient air s air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 constitute ambient air val that actually operates
  • supply cap 600 supply joint 610, supply valve 620, first a springs 630 and 650, supply slider 640, valve seat 660, check valve 670, c air cap 700, ambient air joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first and second a 730 and 750, and ambient air slider 740 will be described with refere through 33
  • Figure 23 is a diagram that shows supply cap 600
  • Figure 23 (a) is a dia side view of supply cap 600
  • Figure 23 (b) is a diagram that shows a side v 600 from the perspective of arrow XXIIIb in Figure 23 (a)
  • Figure 23 (c) shows a plan view of supply cap 600
  • Figure 23 (d) is a diagram that shows supply cap 600
  • Figure 23 (e) is a cross-sectional view of supply cap XXIIIe-XXIIIe in Figure 23 (c)
  • supply cap 600 is formed with a two-step view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in the upper side part in Figure 23 (a) is supply securing part 601, which is fa circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and is formed into a r shape, while the lower side part in Figure 23 (b) is ink storage part 602, storage space for preventing ink from dripping to the outside of ink cartridg Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engagement hol formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to the part in the moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply m are cut out facing the direction of ink storage part 602 from the top surface part 601 (upper end surface in Figure 23 (b)), are formed on supply securing
  • the region from the circle that forms insertion hole 605 to outward is first upper wall 606a, which forms the upper end surface of in and the region from the circle of the outer side that forms first upper wall one step outward is sloping wall 606b, which forms a sloping surface that sl the direction of the bottom surface of ink storage part 602
  • the region fro outer side that forms this sloping wall 606b to the circle one step outward i which forms the lower end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region the outer side that forms lower wall 606c to the circle one step outward is 606d, which forms the lower end surface of supply securing part 601 and fo surface of ink storage part 602
  • the part that connects lower wall 606c and 606d is outer circumferential wall 606e
  • sloping wall 606b slopes downward, so the insertion op is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in that it decreases in diameter towards insertion hole 605 with a maximum opening 600a, which forms the final exit of the ink
  • the inn surface on the side of axial center Ol of sloping wall 606b becomes the i f
  • Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610
  • Figure 24(a) is a di side view of supply joint 610
  • Figure 24(b) is a diagram that shows a plan v
  • Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply joint 61 is a cross-sectional view of supply joint 610 through line XXIVd-XXIVd in
  • supply joint 610 is formed in three step perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in Figu illustrated in the bottommost step (lower side m Figure 24(a)) is joint outer
  • circumference part 611 which is the part that makes contact with second upper wall 606d of in of supply cap 600 (see Figure 23) and the inner circumferential surface part 601 and forms the outer circumference part of supply joint 610
  • circumference part 611 is the part that is sandwiched between second u supply cap 600 and the outside end surface of ink supply element 116 w which supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116
  • the part illustr of joint outer circumference part 611 is joint inner circumference part 612 into and arranged inside ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) and circumference part of supply joint 610, and the upper portion of joint inner 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a)
  • the part illustrated at the top circumference part 612 is joint contact part 613, which makes contact with (see Figure 25)
  • Supply joint 610 is made of an elastic material such as a res
  • the axial center of supply joint 610 is p Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes contact with the bottom surface o and blocks the flow path of the ink Further, joint protruding part 614, wh the inner circumferential surface toward axial center 01, opening 612c, insertion opening of needle 49 (see Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 6 circumference part 612 (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insert which is formed between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, ar inner circumference part 612 As illustrated in Figure 24(c), the portion o 612d that is formed in a stepped shape is formed with roughly equivalent center Ol in the outer circumferential direction Inner circumferential sur protruding part 614 is provided parallel to the direction of axial center mechanism 500, and stepped surface 614b is provided in a direction that is direction of axial center Ol
  • ink flow path 615 which passes thr surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613 a of joint cont the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)
  • supply joint path 615 consists of opening 612c, which is formed on bottom surface 61 path 615a, which is demarcated by stepped insertion passage 612d connecte protruding part flow path 615b, which is demarcated by inner circumferenti joint protruding part 614 connected to insertion passage 612d, and contact p which is demarcated by stepped surface 614b connected to inner circumfer of joint protruding part 614 and inner circumferential surface 613b of join connected to this stepped surface 614b
  • step part flow path 615a is formed in a stepped shape axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path 615a is formed towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, step part flow path 61 stepped shape such that the diameter gradually decreases from opening needle 49
  • supply cap 600 is equipped with ink stora portion of the lower half of step part flow path 615a that is formed in a s alternatively be formed in a tapered shape
  • Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smallest diamet 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape
  • the insid protruding part flow path 615b is formed such that it is slightly smaller th needle 49 (see Figure 2)
  • Contact part flow path 615c is formed into cylindrical shape having an inside diameter that is larger than that of protru 615b, and this inside diameter is sufficiently larger than the diameter of n stepped surface 614b is formed on the border of protruding part flow path part flow path 615c, the inside diameter in the direction of axial center O part flow path 615b to contact part flow path 615c drastically change illustrated in Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 assumes a structure tha countersunk shape by its inner circumferential surface 613b and stepped sur 613a of joint contact part 613 is positioned in the periphery of this cutout pa
  • Needle 49 which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the upper flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and is inserted into protrud 615b At this time, because the inside diameter of protruding part flow pa smaller than the diameter of needle 49, needle 49 elastically adheres to inn surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow pressed inside such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b In protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that is pressed i flow path 615b Moreover, if the area of the part of supply joint 610 that ela the periphery of needle 49 becomes large, the resistance when ink cartridg multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1) becomes large, and smooth installat impossible
  • a configuration that establishe Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620
  • Figure 25(a) is a d a side view of supply valve 620
  • Figure 25(b) is a diagram that shows
  • supply valve 620 is equipped with valve which forms the bottom surface of supply valve 620 (lower side surface in valve outer circumferential wall 622, which is provided along the direction of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) from this valve bottom wall 6
  • valve guide grooves 623 into which slider loose insertion slider 640 (see Figure 27) is loosely inserted, is formed on valve outer ci 622
  • the pair of valve guide grooves 623 formed with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500
  • valve projecting wall 624 which projects in the opposite bottom wall 621 from the top of valve outer circumferential wall 622 in the center 01, is formed on valve outer circumferential wall 622, and valve gui formed across the vicinity of the bottom of valve outer circumferential wal of this valve projecting wall 624
  • valve constraining parts 625 which project in the op valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of supply slider 640, is c outer circumferential wall 622
  • Each of the valve constraining parts 625 valve hook part 626 which projects towards axial center Ol from its tip (ti portion in Figure 25 (a)) and engages with supply slider 640 protruding parts 622a, the inner circumferential surface of ink supply ele outer circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contac supply element 116 becomes large, and the resistance at the time of opera large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 622a formed in semic provided, only valve protruding parts 622a make contact with the inn surface of ink supply element 116, and the operations of supply valve 620 element 116 become smooth
  • Valve constraining parts 625 and valve projecting wall are formed suc upward from valve outer circumferential wall 622 As a result, the misali slider 640 in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial center Ol
  • valve bottom wall 62 from its bottom surface and is equipped with valve bearing part 628, which receives spring top part 632 of first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26)
  • Valv is made of two plate-shaped members arranged in parallel on valve bot illustrated in Figure 25 (e), the height of valve bearing part 628 in the direct Ol is formed such that it is substantially lower than valve outer circum Valve bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sp make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 630 space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is because, if first makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the ink flow path is blocked on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and on the inside of ink
  • Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply spring 630
  • Figure 26(a shows a side view of first supply spring 630
  • Figure 26(b) is a diagram that of first supply spring 630
  • Figure 26(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom v spring 630
  • Figure 26(d) is a cross-sectional view of first supply sprin XXVId-XXVId in Figure 26(b)
  • First supply spring 630 is formed in a roughly reversed bowl shape (or cone), and it is primarily equipped with ring-shaped spring bottom part 631 bottom surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the side with the ring-shaped spring top part 632, which is formed with a diameter that i diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and forms the top part of the up supply spring 630 (end of the side with the smaller diameter), and sprin which is connected between this spring top part 632 and spring bottom p and deforms when a load is applied in the direction of axial center mechanism 500 (the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pres (see Figure 2), also the biased direction of first supply spring 630 and sec 650)
  • Spring top part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of sup Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 in the joint 610 (see Figure 24)
  • the diameter of spring bottom part 631 is for larger than the diameter of spring top part 632, so spring bottom part 631 fo spring plastic part 633 is elastically
  • ink flow path 634 which communicat Figure 26(d), the area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually inc of spring top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of spring top in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction perpendicular t spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed into a roughly reversed bowl s on the side moving away from axial center 01, spring plastic part 633 c deformed than in the case in which spring plastic part 633 is a roughly conic
  • top part flow path 634a of spring top par formed into a roughly quadrilateral shape
  • the air bubbles contained in the ink are spherical, so whe blocked by air bubbles that grow larger than the inside diameter of top pa the ink flow path (passage) is eliminated, and it is not possible to send in device 1 (see Figure 1) normally
  • the quality of printing by mult decreases
  • the opening of top part flow path 634a quadrilateral shape the four corners are not blocked even if air bubbles tha the opening surface of top part flow path 634a accumulate, so it is p decreases in printing quality by preventing the ink flow path from being bl opening surface of top part flow path 634a is not limited to a quadril alternatively be formed into a polygon such as a hexahedron or a star embodiment, even if it is circular, it may be formed
  • spring top part 632 is formed into cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center 01, and it is fo cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center Ol (b first supply spring 630) is uniform
  • spring bottom part 631 is a axial center Ol become weak in comparison to spring bottom part 631
  • spring plastic part 633 is formed such that it has a thinner bottom part 631 and spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength first supply spring 630 elastically deforms
  • Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that of first and the composition of second supply spring 650 consists of spring botto top part 652, spring plastic part 653, and ink flow path 654 (top part flow part flow path 654b, and bottom part flow path 654c)
  • first ambient second supply spring 750 are also formed with the same shape as that of 630, and they respectively consist of sp ⁇ ng bottom parts 731 and 751, sp and 752, spring plastic parts 7
  • Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(a) is a d a side view of supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(b) is a diagram that shows a si slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb in Figure 27(a)
  • Figure 27(d) is a diagram th view of supply slider 640
  • Figure 27(e) is a cross-sectional view of through line XXVIIe-XXVIIe in Figure 27(c)
  • Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a higher degre first supply sp ⁇ ng 630 (see Figure 26) and second supply spring 650, a equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 641, which forms the supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting walls 642a and 642b, which slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction of axial center mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose insertion parts 643, which extend circumferential wall 641 to the
  • slider outer circumferential wall 641 is form roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 631 and 651 supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting walls 642a and / 642b ar they project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction so when first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are arranged, the mo second springs 630 and 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol result, first and second springs 630 and 650 are elastically deformed in the center Ol
  • Slider loose insertion parts 643 are formed such that they extend in the center Ol of supply slider 640 (formed across slider outer circumferential protruding part 642), so when they are loosely inserted into valve guide Figure 25), they are moved smoothly in the direction of axial center Ol of and misalignment in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial prevented
  • Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(a) is a dia side view of valve seat 660
  • Figure 28(b) is a diagram that shows a plan 660
  • Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of valve seat 660, a cross-sectional view of valve seat 660 through line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in
  • valve seat 660 is equipped with valve sea which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and makes contact w 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat bearing parts 662, which top surface of this valve seat bottom part 661 (upper side in Figure 28 (a) bearing part 662 is equipped with valve seat sloping surface 662a, which sl than valve seat sloping surface 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (ho valve seat bearing part 662) Therefore, because first valve seat throu formed on a portion that differs from the portion that receives check valve of the ink flow path can be prevented Moreover, second valve seat through-holes 663, which pass through part 661, are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve seat second valve seat through-holes 663 are formed with left-right symmetry b line (center lme Q illustrated in Figure 28) that passes through axial cente mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) in Figure 28(b) This second valve seat form an ink flow path through which ink flows
  • valve seat communicating gr connect each of the second valve seat through-holes 663, are formed on the valve seat bottom part 661
  • Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each o projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumferential top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second supply direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
  • Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670
  • Figure 29(a) is a dia side view of check valve 670
  • Figure 29(b) is a diagram that shows a plan v 670
  • Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of check valve 67 is a cross-sectional view of check valve 670 through line XXIXd-XXIXd in 5
  • Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape from a sid
  • umbrella part 671 and shaft part 672 blocks the flow making contact with cover 680 (see Figure 30), and, as illustrated m Figur it is equipped with linking part 671, which is connected to shaft part 672, a 0 which extends roughly uniformly in the outer circumferential direction fro 671a and is formed with a thin profile
  • linking part 671 which is connected to shaft part 672, a 0 which extends roughly uniformly in the outer circumferential direction fro 671a and is formed with a thin profile
  • cover 680 deformed, so it is possible to reliably block the ink flow path communicat 680 and check valve 670 5
  • the bottom surface of umbrella part 6 curved shape and is supported by valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve se 28) so the flow path of the ink is opened in the state in which umbrella pa by valve seat bearings 662 of valve seat 660, while the flow path of the in state in which umbrella part 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cov 0 Shaft
  • first cover through-holes 683 form a which ink flows, and when umbrella part 671 of check valve 670 (see contact with cover top part 682, first cover through-holes 683 are blocked path is thus also blocked
  • second cover through-hole 684 into which shaft part 672 of inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (position passing th Ol of ink supply mechanism 500) Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is second cover through-hole 684, and check valve 670 is thereby attached which check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through-hole 684, th ink is formed on a portion of this inner circumferential surface
  • 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cover top part 682, the through-hole is blocked, so the ink flow path of second cover through-hole center is simultaneously blocked
  • Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31 (a) shows a side view of ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31(b) is a diagram that sh ambient air cap 700 from the perspective of arrow XXXIb in Figure 31 (a) diagram that shows a plan view of ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31 (d) is a dia bottom view of ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 31(e) is a cross-sectional v ambient air securing part 701 (lower side in Figure 31 (a)) to the vicini (vicinity of the end of the upper side in Figure 31 (a)) and are engaged wit 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 described above when am fastened to ambient air intake element 117, are formed on ambient air securi
  • ambient air cap cutout parts 704a and 704 cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), which are formed in approximately 90° with respect to axial center 02 from the positions in holes 703a and 703b are formed and are cut out
  • ambient air cap insertion hole 705 into which joint skirt part 714 ambient air joint 710, which will be described below, and valve open par 33) of ambient air valve 720 are inserted, is formed in a roughly central p air cap bottom wall 702
  • Ambient air joint 710 (see Figure 32) is housed contact with the inside surface of ambient air cap bottom wall 70 circumferential surface of ambient air securing part 701
  • ambient air cap 700 When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake element 11 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 protrude in the out direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient air cap 700 is attached diameter in the outer circumferential direction Therefore, when ambient a attached, it can be attached without applying strong pressure, so it is possi installation efficiency while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
  • Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(a) shows a side view of ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(b) is a diagram that of ambient air joint 710
  • Figure 32(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom vi joint 710
  • Figure 32(d) is a cross-sectional view of ambient air joint f
  • ambient air joint 710 is made of an elastic material such as when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), j which is formed with a thin profile, makes contact with the end surfac device 1 and is elastically deformed
  • joint contact part 713 projects from to joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that makes contac valve 720)
  • Joint contact part 713 is formed such that it narrows toward ti part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a makes contact with the bottom surf valve 720 and blocks the ambient air intake path
  • joint passage 715 which passes from the bottom surface of joint inner circu to tip 713a of joint contact part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32 ambient air joint 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720
  • joint passage 715 which passes from the bottom surface of joint inner circu to tip 713a of joint contact part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32 ambient air joint 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720
  • joint passage 715 which passes from the bottom surface of joint inner circu to tip 713a of joint contact part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32 ambient air joint 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720
  • joint passage 715
  • Ambient air valve 720 is equipped with valve open part 721a, which bottom surface of valve bottom wall 721 Valve open part 721a is position 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 and is roughly formed into a ro semicircular convex part 721b, which projects from the bottom part (lo Figure 22) to valve bottom wall 721 in the outer circumferential direction outer circumferential surface of valve open part 721a
  • This valve open par joint passage 715 (see Figure 32) of ambient air joint 710 described above, is exposed to the outside of ambient air cap 700 (see Figure 31)
  • valve open part 721a the end surface of multifunction device 1, and the contact with joint co 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an ambient air intake
  • joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and val operates, joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also makes contact wi of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, and this blocks communi ambient air intake path and the outside of joint skirt part 714 As a result, introduced from the side of multifunction device 1 can be introduced sm even if joint skirt part 714 elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and valve open part 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex open part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservoir chamb
  • ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted in inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116, and a mechanism 510 is inserted into and attached to inner circumferential surfa air intake element 117
  • ink supply mechanism 500 which is attached to ink supply ele described On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 11 801, which projects in the direction of the inside of inner circumfer
  • Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this check valve 67
  • Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom surface side of this v side in Figure 34
  • supply slider 640 is arranged such that it houses t spring 650
  • First supply spring 630 is housed by supply slider 640 on th second supply spring 650
  • first supply spring 630 is arranged between and supply valve 620
  • supply joint 610 is arranged such that it the bottom surface of supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to supply element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 116a and 1 element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supply mechanism 5 Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply determined by supply cap 600 and stepped surface 801a of inner circumfer of ink supply element 116 small Therefore, even if supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal direct
  • slider platform part 644 is in a state in which it spring bottom part 631 of first supply spring 630 and spring bottom part spring member 650 On the contact side of spring platform part 644 with 631 of second supply spring 650, it is engaged by two valve hook parts 6 620, and movement in the direction of axial center Ol is thus rest ⁇ cted between supply valve 620 and supply slider 640 is shorter than the len spring 630 in the direction of axial center 01, so first supply spring 630 is deformed in the position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
  • ambient air intake mechanism 510 which is attached to ambient 117, will be described On inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air i protruding part 811, which protrudes in the direction of ambient air intak (left direction in Figure 34), is formed on the end surface of ambient forming part 430 on the side of first ambient air communicating chamber T 811 is configured as a pair of plate-shaped member, and it makes contact w of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 As a result, an ambi is formed between protruding part 811 and spring top part 752 of second 750 Moreover, the position of ambient air intake mechanism 510 on the si air communicating hole 434 is determined as a result of second ambie making contact with protruding part 811 outside of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this ambient air j air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 117a and 117b of element 117, so the position on the outside of ambient air
  • first ambient air spring 730 is already plast the position in which it is attached to ambient air intake element 117
  • Figure 35 is a diagram that explains the manufactur film 160 is welded
  • Figure 36 is a diagram that explains the welding pr Figure 36(a) is a diagram that explains the welding surface of frame part 11 160 is welded
  • Figure 36(b) is a diagram that explains the welding pro 160 is welded to frame part 110
  • Figure 37 is a diagram that explains process performed after film 160 is welded
  • Figure 37(a) is a diagram attachment process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air 510 are attached to frame part 110
  • Figure 37(b) is a diagram that explains process
  • Figure 37(c) is a diagram that explains the ink dispensing proc diagram that explains the installation process of case 200
  • Figure 38(a) explains the process in which case 200 sandwiches frame part 110
  • diagram that explains the welding process in which case 200 is welde diagram that explains the manufacturing process performed before ink cartri
  • Figure 39(a) is a diagram that explains the process in which protector 30 is
  • attachment shaft 472a which is provided on attac sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which is provide supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (sensor arm 470 a preparatory process)
  • Arm sandwiching part 425 opens on the opposite sid supply element 116 (top of Figure 35)
  • the opening of ar 425 opens on the side of second reservoir chamber opening 114
  • sensor arm 470 can be efficiently attached with little inter shielding arm part 473c of arm part 473 is attached such that it is house detection part 140 (inside enclosure part 141)
  • sensor arm 470 i sandwiching part 425 the vertical and horizontal range of movement of 473c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141d of enclosure part 141 of det other words, once the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, sensor a easily detached, so it is possible to prevent the manufacturing process of ink becoming complicated and to prevent sensor arm 470 from de
  • a supporting part that forms the axis of rotational o arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (attachment shaft 472a) of supported on arm sandwiching part 425 of frame part 110, but a configur attachment shaft is provided on the side of frame part 110 and a sandwichi on the side of sensor arm 470 may also be used, and a configuration in whi and frame part 110 are attached using a hinge junction would also be ac outside surface of frame part 110, and it is not pressed to a position such th with bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451 This is because, a first dispensing communicating hole 452 of dispensing passage forming par the side surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, and when ink dispensing p to the back of dispensing cylinder part 451 , first dispensing communicatmg block, making it impossible to dispense ink Moreover, ink dispensing attached before sensor arm 470 is attached
  • film 160 is then welded (film 160 securing process) to frame part 110 such that it covers both the openings of first opening opening 112b
  • film 160 is welded to both sides of fram securing processes - a first securing process in which film 160 is welded to (preparatory process), and a second securing process in which film 160 is opening 112b
  • film 160 is cut such that it is larger than t of frame part 110 and it covers frame part 110
  • film 160 is opening 112a and second opening 112b without wrinkles by aspirating aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) from the side of frame part 110 surface 900 of an ultrasonic welding device (not illustrated in the figure) is 160 such that it covers the outer circumference parts of first and second o 112b (outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of 160 is welded to frame part 110
  • film 160 is welded to
  • film 160 is made of a double-layered film comprising a polyethylene film (called "nylon polyethylene” hereafter), and the side t with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film layer
  • nylon polyethylene liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a small amount of gas circ between ink reservoir chamber 111, which is roughly sealed by film 160, 930 (see Figure 39(b)), which will be described below
  • film 160 may be made of any type of subst a film in which a nylon film and a polypropylene film are formed into t formed by mixing nylon and polyethylene or nylon and polypropylene coul
  • Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is made o substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 Because f part 110 are formed from the same material, both film 160 and the welded and welded reliably at the time of ultrasonic welding In this embodime double-layer structure Nylon films are superior to polyethylene films from strength, but their melting point is high, so they are deficient from the pers operationality Therefore, when film 160 is formed with a double-layer nylon and polyethylene, the strength is secured, and by using the polyeth layer that is welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low he so welding operationality is secured Furthermore, the nylon layer doe welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of the film in welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity of the welded maintained component in which cover 680, check valve 670, and valve seat 660 are f inserted inside ink supply element 116 (position that makes contact wit 801a) At this time, the tip of check valve 670 is inserted into
  • Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoi decompressed by pressure reducing device 910, so even after the dis complete, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is in the deco pressure pi) Therefore, there are cases in which a subsequent decompres required after the ink dispensing process If a subsequent decompression performed, the manufacturing process could be simplified However, th mside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed is not ne prescribed range, so in this embodiment, a subsequent decompression proc order to adjust the air pressure to a level within the prescribed range (in or the air pressure is within the prescribed range)
  • the subsequent deco that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be described
  • the subsequ process is performed using ink dispensing needle 920, which was inserted i plug 520
  • a supply device that supplies ink (not illustrated i pressure reducing device that reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambie part 110 (not illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing nee the ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decompressi reducing device is begun
  • the air pressure p3 (third pressure) inside ink 111 after subsequent decompression is performed is lower than the air pres reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed Therefore, the quantity reservoir chamber 111 further decreases as a result of the subsequent deco so the generation of air bubbles mside the ink can be prevented, and th printing quality due to air bubbles can be avoided Moreover, the ink that fl of the ink dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside in
  • first and second case members 210 and 220 another (case 200 welding process)
  • first case welded part 216 of first case member 210 and firs 226 of second case member 220 are welded together
  • second case weld case member 210 and second case welded part 227 of second case memb together the portions indicated by the diagonal lines in Figure 38(b) ar embodiment, the entire first and second welded parts 226 and 227 are weld welding process, but several spots may be partially welded instead
  • first and second case members 210 and 220 are a ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first and second case 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultrasonic welding is abs Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations in
  • case projecting parts 214a and 224a (c 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecting parts 214b and 224 part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) project outward from ink sup ambient air intake part 130 Therefore, when ink cartridge 14 is to be when ink cartridge 14 is attached to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), such that it can be freely attached and detached
  • prot and 330bl of protector 300 engage with through-holes formed by case proj 214a and 224a (see Figure 8) of first and second case members 2 through-holes formed by case projecting cutout parts 214b and 224b of fir members 210 and 220, and protector 300 is thus attached to case 200 protector fitting parts 330a and 330b of protector 300 elastically deform i away from one another, protector 300 can be easily attached and detached
  • packaging bag 930 packaging space decompression p bag 930 is a bag element with one open end (end of the right front side of in the packaging process, all of the other opened portions excluding ultrasonically welded in a state in which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed S pressure reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931 , and the of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction pump pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is at a level lowe pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes air pressure p2 (second p lower than air pressure p3 that is reduced inside ink reservoir chamber 111 when a subsequent decompression process is not performed)
  • pressure reducing device 940 is complete, suction tube 941 is removed a welded, resulting in a state in
  • ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging bag 930 in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 200, so it never ma with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink supply part 120) as packaging bag 9 decompression Valve open part 721a projects to the outside of ambient air if packaging bag 930 makes direct contact with valve open part 721a, val operates and the ambient
  • Figure 40 is a diagram that shows th ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction device 1
  • Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured such that it does not ou signal to a control unit provided on multifunction device 1 when light r receives light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a and outputs (or signal to the control device when light that is emitted from light emitting and is not received by light receiving part 57b
  • ink cartridge 14 when ink cartridge 14 (in the state in whi removed) is to be installed in multifunction device 1, ink cartridge 14 is inst supply part 120 is located below ambient air intake part 130 This st installation position (or first position) of ink cartridge 14 Moreover, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifun supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are seq from bottom to top, and ink supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambi 130 are formed on a single end surface As is clear from Figure 40(b), this
  • a portion of the back surfa 14 is push part 200a, and this is a part that is pushed such that it makes co retaining member 61
  • the pushing retaining member 61 of th contacts the push part 200a forming a portion of the back surface of the pushing the ink cartridge 14 m the installation direction F
  • the door lock member 62 of the door member 60 fits into the lock 46 of the refill unit 13, completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 ( 40 (c))
  • the middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central posit direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14
  • the position where the member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position including the middle cartridge 14 and extending below the middle point p In other words, the provided at a position above the ink supply part 120 and below the ambient in the vertical direction
  • the pushing retaining member 61 since the pushing retaining member 61 is impelled by th described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 When the ink car installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit 13, the elastic force of the sp 650, 730 and 750 of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the ambient air inta act in the direction away from the side on which needle 49 is arranged (left in the direction opposite to the installation direction) As described a retaining member 61 is configured to have a greater elastic force than generated by the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able t ink cartridge 14 once it has been installed Furthermore, the push part 200 by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substantially in the middl supply part 120 and the ambient air intake part 130, allowing a substantial force to be applied to the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intake because the ink cartridge 14 is retained at three points in the installation d cartridge 14 - one point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing reta and two points
  • Figure 41 is a drawing illustrating the state wit 14 having been installed in the multifunction device 1 Since Figure 41 i purpose of explaining the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and mechanism 510, the case 200, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction dev have been omitted from the drawing
  • the detection part 140 consists With regard to the ink supply mechanism 500, when the ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1, the needle 49 is inserted through the space surroun wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 60 path 615 of the supply joint 600 in that order, and the tip of the needle 49 bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620, depressing the supply valve 62 supply valve 620 moves away from the joint contact part 613 of the supply an ink flow path The needle 49 communicates with a discharge opening the multifunction device 1 via ink extraction opening 52 and ink tube 53 F tip of the needle 49, a cutout 49a is formed for securing an ink flow path, path is secured by the cutout 49a even if the tip of the needle 49 contacts wall 621 of the supply valve 620
  • the first supply spring 630 supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described above, has a slig flexible part 633
  • the spring flexi second supply spring 650 arranged on the opposite side of the supply slider supply spring 630 This serves to determine the flexing order of the first springs 630 and 650
  • the first supply spring 630 with the fle part 633 flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that whe inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second supply thereafter
  • the ink flow path K is a flow path f ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), second supply communicati supply communicating hole 421, first cover through-hole 683 (and second c 684) of c ⁇ ver 680, first valve seat through-hole 662b and second valve seat of valve seat 660, valve seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, r
  • the ti contact part 613 is hardly displaced in the direction of insertion, but is slig direction away from the needle 49
  • the shape change of the accompanying insertion of the needle 49 is such that the joint contact parts away from each other Assuming the joint contact part 613 had a shape wit surface going from the inner circumferential surface 614a of the joint pro
  • ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the slider outer circumfe the ambient air valve 720 are formed to be substantially equal
  • misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient air slider direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 can be preve the inside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the ou the spring bottom parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air sp and 750 are formed to be substantially equal
  • valve outer circumferenti ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the inside diameter intake element 117, since valve protruding part 722a is formed outward fr circumferential wall 722 of the ambient air valve 720, misalignment i displacement when the ambient air valve 720 operates in the direction o prevented Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis 02 intake mechanism 510 is stabilized
  • This flow path is the main flow path through which the majority of the Furthermore, the space between the valve outer circumferential wall 722 valve 720 and the inner circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intak forms part of the ambient air intake path Subsequently, as illustrated in Fig passes through the first ambient air communicating chamber 431, comm 433a, ambient air connection passage 433, communicating opening 433b, communicating chamber 432, second ambient air communicating hole 435 air communicating hole 436, and is admitted mside the ink reservoir cham ambient air intake path L is opened, air is taken in such that the inside o chamber 111 is brought to ambient air pressure
  • the ink flow path K and the ambient air intake when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the ambient air intake mec that they operate smoothly and without misalignment relative to the axes installation of the ink cartridge 14 is made easier, while allowing the sup intake of ambient air to be carried out reliably
  • Figure 42 illustrates the operation of the sensor arm 470 according to the quantity o the ink reservoir chamber 111
  • Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with re
  • Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty)
  • the direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the co buoyancies and the gravities acting on the right side portion (on the side o part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the balance part 471) Ho simplify the explanation, the description will now be made assuming that large amount of ink is stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111 (in the s stored is at least above the level of the lower ends of the inner circumfer 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b), since the balance part 471 of the sensor arm 4 resin material with lower specific gravity than the specific gravity of the generated on the balance part 471 increases, and the balance part 471 float the balance part 471 is inside the ink, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the co gravity and buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 cause a rotating f in the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl in Figure 43), but the 473c comes into contact with the arm supporting part 143 which rises fro 141a of the detection part 140 (enclosure part 141) and is thus placed in
  • the liquid surface I of the ink drops
  • the blocking arm part 473 c emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink
  • the balance part 471 also emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink Whe 471 emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink
  • the buoyancy generated o 471 which causes the sensor arm 470 to rotate in the clockwise directio arrow Gl in Figure 43
  • the gravity generated on the balance part 471 sensor arm 470 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction (the directio Figure 43) balance each other out, so the overall combined force is balance the liquid surface I of the ink drops further
  • the balance part 471 moves do the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterclockwise This causes the shielding arm part 473 c to move upward away from the arm su and an optical path is created between the light emitting part 57a and light r i
  • the out-of-ink lamp is illuminated or audio is used to inform device is out of ink
  • a counter provided in the contr the number of times ink has been discharged and to detect the quantity of additionally employing a software counter which hypothetically determines out of ink 120, ambient air intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged to surface of the ink cartridge 14
  • Furtherm part 120 being a part which supplies ink by causing it to flow out to the m 1, is preferably arranged at the lower side of the ink cartridge 14 so as to complete utilization of the ink, while the ambient air intake part 130, being in ambient air into the ink cartridge 14, is preferably arranged at the upp cartridge 14
  • the dete preferably arranged at the lower side of the ink cartridge 14 so as to complete utilization of the ink
  • the balance part 4 second supply communicating hole 423 and the vibration caused by operat ink reservoir chamber 111 will decrease
  • center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is placed in the vicinity of the su 422 and the balance part 471 is positioned at the middle of the ink reservo the Y direction, avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor effects on ink flow
  • the top end surface of the shield (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned substantially parallel to th the ink In this state, when the liquid surface of the ink drops and reaches th the top end surface of the shielding arm 473 c, the surface tension of the in retain the shielding arm 473 If the force by which the surface tension of shielding arm 473c is greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, t will not operate properly
  • the top end surface forming the outsi part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle so as to slope down portion of the shielding arm 473 c that is substantially parallel to the liquid
  • the force exerted by the surface tension of the ink on the shielding reduced, allowing the sensor arm 470 to operate normally
  • Figure 44 is a cross-sectional view illustrati the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 in a wrong orie
  • the needle 49 is a member for extracting the cartridge 14 and supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrat cases where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately sup is not performed accurately
  • the needle 49 deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve opening part 7 providing a difference between projection distance t8 and projection distan above, collision between the needle 49 and the valve opening part 721a can making it possible to prevent damage or deformation of the needle 49 and be reliably supplied
  • the mechanism for preventing dripping o cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1 will be describ drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartridge 14 from the mult and a front view of the ink cartridge 14 Figure 46 (a) and Figure 46 illustrating the state change when the ink cartridge 14 is removed, and Fig front view of the ink cartridge 14
  • the ink suppl includes a valve mechanism impelled by a first supply spring 630 and a sec 650, so when removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction devi from the state of Figure 46 (a) to the state of Figure 46 (b)), ink may adher tip of the needle 49, or in the worst case, ink may flow out from the ink sup the valve 620 moves in the direction such that it contacts with the joint cont the impelling force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply sp needle 49 is removed from the supply joint 610, ink is pushed out in the di flows out from the protruding part flow path 615b to the step part flow path may stick to the protruding tip 49 of the needle or flow outside the ink Consequently, when the ink cartridge 14 is removed, the ink adhe ⁇ ng to th 49 may drip down in the form of ink drops, or ink may flow down from t
  • the detection part 140 when the ink cartridge 14 is orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned at a position correspondin ink detection sensor 57, so the detection part 140 is positioned above the i (or needle 49)
  • the majority of the ink spattering from the needle 49 and i spatters downward (opposite to the direction of detection part 140) under i the adhesion of ink to the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arra part 140 above the ink supply part 120
  • the detection surfaces formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the detection pa insertion hole 605 see Figure 47 (b)
  • the majority of the ink spatter insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fashion, so even if ink s the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will adhere to the detection surfac making it possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 14
  • the 140a and 140b of the detection part 140 will be arranged vertically (the t
  • the detection part 140 is a case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part 57a and light receiv remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is formed on both sides of the detec and 140b by the case cutouts 213 and 223
  • the detection part 140 is c 200, so even if ink should spatter, adhesion of the spattered in
  • case 40 is arranged in the multifunction device 1, but it i provide a multifunction device 1 wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of is a cross-sectional view showing the simplified cross-section of cases 40 a
  • Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is a simplified c of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 48 ' (b) Fi cross-section of needle forming member 48 and ink cartridge 14, with t making up the cases 40 and 2040 being omitted from the illustration Furth 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14c, a black in as ink cartridge 14kl, and a large capacity black ink cartridge is illustrat 14k2
  • case 40 is configured to accommodate so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arrangement of the four i color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a large capacity 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In othe capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14kl is selectiv at an end position in the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the le Figure 48 (a))
  • the case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a la ink cartridge 14k2
  • case 2040 is configured to accommodate cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four ink cartridges, three color are arranged side by side, and a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjace words, just as in case 40, the black ink cartridge 14kl is accommodated at the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in Fi Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k cartridge 14kl to be installed,
  • case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 only allows instal cartridge 14kl This implies providing users with two types of multifun already discussed above, since users whose frequency of text printing is l large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2, it is preferable to provide such us multifunction device 1 that does not allow installation of a large capacity 14k2 Furthermore, since case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14 installing large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in e majority of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost
  • the ink supply mechanism 500 is a impelled by the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650, cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1, ink may flow supply part 120 or, in the worst case, ink may spatter around The needle continuously, without any partition plates being provided between the needl spatters from the ink supply part 120, the spattered ink ends up adheri needles 49
  • the needles 49 are parts, which supply ink to the multifunction a different ink color is mixed into a needle 49, color change will occur d printing quality will decline
  • the black ink is a while the color inks consist of dye type inks This is because black ink is text printing, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low permeab order to make the edges of the characters clear, while color ink is used p printing, so it is made from a dye type ink with high permeability into pape the granularity of dots less apparent and improve the appearance of the col there is little effect of color change
  • Figure 50 the state of installation of the large c cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartridges 14c i described Figure 50 is a simplified cross-section illustrating in simplified installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2 inside case 40 Figure 5 state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c installed in case 40 and Figure 50 (b) i of ink cartridges 14k2 and 14c installed in case 40
  • accommodating grooves 42cl to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the case welded parts 216, 22 case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of case 200 or case 1200 Accommod to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all formed to the same shape
  • the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and 4 between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separation dista space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42c4 provides a separ longer than distance tl2
  • the black in formed with a larger outer shape than the other color ink cartridges 14c so t 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a the difference between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away fr part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cartridges direction in Figure 50)
  • the difference between distance tl2 and distance the difference between gap tl6 and gap tl7 between needles 49 desc corresponds to the difference between the higher of verticals wall parts 21 first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the height of vertical w 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure 13, or the d ink cartridge 14kl and the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2
  • Figure 51 is a schematic drawing, which sche the combination of case members 210, 220, 1210, 2210 and 2220
  • Figure 51 (a) is a schematic drawing of case 200
  • the pre case 200 comprises first and second case members 210 and 220, with the first and second case members 210 and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts
  • Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200 Case 2200 compris case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe and 2220b to 22 second case members 2210 and 2220, the left-right direction in Fig respectively tl 9, which is approximately twice the thickness of tl 8
  • Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200 Case 1200 compris case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe and 220b to 22 second case members 1210 and 220, the left-right direction in Figure 51(c) first case member 1210 and tl 8 for the second case member 220
  • Cases 200, 1200 and 2200 consist of resm material and are manufac molding
  • a die corresponding to each case 200, 1200 and 2200 is types of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases
  • Namel 1200 and 2200 have a space inside them, at least two members are necessar of them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid me that opening
  • three cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different members are necessary
  • the second case member 220 for black is made comm case member 220 for color
  • a special die is not necessary for the se 220 for black, providing a reduction in costs
  • the first case mem merely involves making the first case member 210 for color deeper and pro
  • the tip side of the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 121 member 1210 used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertic to 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first c case members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are mu cartridges 144c, 14kl and 14k2, a cost reduction can be achieved by usin much as possible
  • cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from through-holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par the outside are made the same shape, and substantially semi-circular case 212, 221, 222, 1211, 1212, 2211, 2212, 2221 and 2222 corresponding to through-holes are formed in the same substantially semi-circular shape member 210, second case member 220, first case member 1210 for black, 2210 for large capacity black and second case member 2220 for large partially common structure can be used for each of the dies, reducing the
  • case 1200 was made from the second cas case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substantially the same sha member of case 2200
  • the vertical wall parts 210b to 22Oe of case members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially eq outside shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sa
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the seco configured with a different location of the ambient air intake part 130 as c cartridge 14 of the first embodiment
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the se ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge 3014 through an ambient air in formed in a labyrinth shape going from a through-hole 3130 formed on the case 3200
  • the refill unit 3013 of the seco configured with the position of the pushing retaining member 3061 provid being lower than the position of the pushing retaining member 61 provided the first embodiment
  • the pushing retaining member 3061 and the ink s configured to be substantially on the same line in the horizontal direct direction in Figure 52 (b)) Being positioned substantially on the same lin which the elastic force acts is also substantially on the same line, reducin cartridge 3014 and allowing it to be stably installed
  • the ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise an ink
  • FIG. 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of the ink ca 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments
  • Figure 53 (a) is a perspective vi outward appearance of ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment, and perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartridge 5 4132 is glued to the ink cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow o ink cartridge 4014 before use
  • the seal mem off, and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
  • the detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting outw surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is formed the ink supply part 41 opening 4121 into which needle 49 is inserted is formed on the project supply part 4120
  • the ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment does n corresponding to ink reservoir element 100, and stores the ink directly insid
  • the ink cartridge 5014 in the fourth exam is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the third example of embodi ink supply part 120 of the first example of embodiment and the similarly part 5120
  • the remaining structure is the same as the ink cartridge in the embodiment, and therefore, the detailed explanation of this will be omitted
  • the detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of embodime include these
  • Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in th embodiment
  • Figure 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within
  • the case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that i be different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of th embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the edge part of the cas 214a and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of th of the first example of embodiment, and using the same references for identical to the first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will b
  • the case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protr and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a a the truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as view (in relation to the first case component 210, when seen from the top of downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
  • the multifunction device 1 of the embodiment there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 Whe 14 has been attached to the correct attachment position, the edge of the ca 214a and 224a will press a protruding piece of the ink cartridge attachme 960 and by pressing this protruding piece, the ink cartridge attachment de will send a signal to the control board 970
  • the control board 970 is a perform the main control of the multifunction device 1
  • the control board 970 includes a CPU calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory that cannot be over stores the control program and the fixed value data, a RAM 973 which is th of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and ink cartridge attachment de that detects whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attached or not, and the in that performs input and output of each type of signal While it is not illust there are also various counters and timers included, the updating of the c timer values will be performed according to the processing performed withi
  • ink cartridge attachment fla cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink cartridge 14 attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink cartridge 14 has been remo the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been turned on, it will remain in is turned off by the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960
  • the ink cartridge attachment detection process illustrated in Figure 58 process that is executed at the specific intervals (for instance, every 4 ms) a the initial set-up process (not illustrated in the figure) after the power sour on for the multifunction device 1
  • the ink ca detection sensor 960 will go on when the protruding piece of the ink ca sensor is pressed, and it will go off when the protruding piece is not remaimng ink detection sensor 57 will go on when the amount of light rec receiving part 57b is below a certain level (when the light path between the 57a and the light receiving part 57b is obstructed), and it will go off when t received by the light receiving part 57b has exceeded a certain level (whe from the light emitting part 57a is received by the light receiving part 57b)
  • this process will confirm whether the remaining ink detec been on or not for longer than the specific time (for instance, greater than 1 remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been on for longer than the specific ti means that the remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been already on f specific time at the timing where the ink cartridge 14 is attached, so it is co are impurities attached to the surface of the light emitting part 57a and the l 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, where these impurities are o path between these surfaces, or it is considered that the sensor 960 malfu if the S 106 process is Yes, then a remaining ink detection sensor ab displayed on the liquid crystal display part 35 (S 107), and this process will e
  • the multifunction device 1 When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1 , in other has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow execution of the pri illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is possible to avoid execution of t in the state in which it is unclear whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attac
  • the ink ca flag 974a When each of the errors has been displayed, and if there is an abnormal executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion button, the ink ca flag 974a will be initialized to 0
  • the remaining ink detection sensor 57 detects that the ink cartridge 14 is attached (or more correctly, that an ink enough amount of remaimng ink has been attached), if the remaimng ink d changed from off to on It is acceptable to allow the execution of printing p remaining ink detection sensor 57 detects that the ink cartridge 14 is attache
  • Figure 59 the seventh and eighth examples of e described Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external appearance of 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment, Figure view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 6014 in the se embodiment, and Figure 59(b) is an angled view showing the external app cartridge 7014 of the eighth example of embodiment
  • the ink cartridges 60 seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will
  • the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the ink cartridges 6014 and 7 and eighth examples of embodiment are arranged within the concave pa formed on the side surfaces, so it is possible to reduce any adherence of from the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 onto the detection parts 6140 and 7
  • the surface of the concave parts 6100 an supply parts 4120 and 5120 side as a sloped surface that is sloped in the d supply parts 4120 and 5120
  • the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eighth examples o also contain sensor arms inside as in the first example of embodiment By 470, it is possible to accurately detect the amount of ink remaining when 4014 and 5014 are attached into the multifunction device 1
  • the tenth example of embodiment Figure 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink
  • the tenth example of embodiment Figure 62 is an exploded perspective vie cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment Figure 63 is a diagr procedure for replacing the ink reservoir element
  • the ink cartridge 14 of t embodiment had a structure in which the ink reservoir element 100 w because it was welded into the first and second case members 210 and 22 this ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment is constructe reservoir element 100 is replaceable
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment ha structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of embodiment, and t structure that is different in relation to the ink cartridge 14 of the first exam will be described, and using the same references for the same parts as in th embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example o a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 200 This
  • the ink cartridge 9014 when manufacturing the ink cartridge 9014, first, the ink res is placed within the first case member 210, and fitting the engagement part of the first case member 210 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b member 920, the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 ar seal 9100 is adhered along the maximum surface 210a and the vertical wa first case member 210 and the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa second case member 220 Then, by attaching the protector 300, the ink manufactured
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has underg the first case member 210 and the second case member 220, the adhesio onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, and the fitting of the 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b , Therefor union of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes it is possible to undo the connection between the first case member 210 a member 220 It is possible to simply perform the undoing of the conne engagement parts 9200a and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and the edge of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement 9201b from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case 223 have been formed Also, as illustrated in Figure 63, because one edge surface of the firs members 210 and 220 are connected via the seal 9100, it is possible to per and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the se 220 is open with respect to the first case member
  • the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of emb undergo the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100
  • detection of the remaining ink is performed by the remaining ink detection sensor 57 tha sides of the detection part 140 of the ink reservoir element 100
  • the determination there is no remaimng ink or that there is no ink cartridge attached
  • Ther be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the stat cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contained has been attach reduce the possibility of generating printing problems
  • the eleventh example of embodiment Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element 9300 of the el embodiment
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of e within the first and second case members, but we will omit a detaile description of the first and second case members
  • the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is formed through i using a resin material, and a bag element 9302 that has flexibility and whic space to store the ink inside, and which is connected to the hard part 9301 has a detection part (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the element is formed through a molding using a resin material Therefore improve the yield when manufacturing the ink reservoir element 9300, ma achieve a reduction in manufacturing costs
  • the hard part 9301 in the ink reservoir element 9300 is for barrier properties, and because it is placed between the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaimng ink detection sensor 57, it will always light that is emitted from the light emitting part 57a Therefore, while it detect the amount of ink remaining within the bag part 9302, it is possible there is an ink reservoir element 9300 contained within the first and seco and therefore, it is possible to prevent any printing processes from being multifunction device 1 while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not contain and second case members
  • Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams to explain the cases with differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where th is different)
  • case Cl is formed of a case member 120 and a case thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the thickness of the case which is thicker than the thickness t20
  • case case member 121 and the case member r22 The thickness of the case me the thickness of the case member r22 is t 22, which is thicker than the thic the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the t case member r21 is different than the difference between the thickness t21 o 121 and the thickness t20 of the case member 120
  • case C3 as il 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65(d) are formed More spec formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and case C4 is member 121 and the case member r21
  • the small scale case Cl, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C8 are formed Also/ the size outer shape of cases Cl, C3, C7, and C8 are all different, with C1 ⁇ C3 ⁇ C8 ⁇ C7 Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with diff according to the amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120 As descnbed above, within the case members that form each case, wh the case members that are placed on one side are different than the thick members that are placed on the other side, it is possible to form four cases sizes (different internal capacities) from the four case members
  • check valve 670 was constructed of the umbrella part part 672, it is acceptable to construct it of only the umbrella part 671 The used to prevent backflow of the ink, and therefore, it is acceptable to cons can block the connection of the first cover through-hole 683 and through-hole 684 of the cover 680 Also, it is acceptable to construct the the second cover through-hole 684
  • the ambient air comm forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped downwards towards t air communicating chamber 432 from the first ambient air communicating because one surface of the ambient air communicating passage 433 is co 160, it is possible to prevent the formation of a meniscus withm communicating passage 433 Therefore, it is acceptable to have a constru ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in the cartridge 14 is attached
  • t case 200 can be substituted with attachment using an adhesive as it is only i that the first and second case members 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability
  • the ink cartridge, the lnkjet recording apparatus and the combinati present invention are widely used for home and office uses

Landscapes

  • Ink Jet (AREA)

Abstract

An ink cartridge includes an ink storage chamber for storing ink provided therein. The ink cartridge is mountable to an inkjet recording apparatus. The inkjet recording apparatus includes: a door disposed on of an accommodating chamber defining a space for accommodating the ink cartridge and allowing the ink cartridge to be mounted thereto in the horizontal direction through a first opening and configured to be rotated about the lower side of the accommodating chamber as an axis of rotation for opening and closing the first opening and closing the first opening when it takes an upright posture; and a pressing member provided on the door for pressing a back surface of the ink cartridge inserted into the accommodating chamber by a resilient force. The ink cartridge comprising: (a) an ink supply part provided on a front side surface being defined in a mounting direction when the ink cartridge is in a mounted posture, which is a posture when the ink cartridge is mounted to the accommodating chamber, and having a second opening for allowing entering of an extracting member of the inkjet recording apparatus when being mounted to the inkjet recording apparatus; (b) a supply valve mechanism for opening and closing the second opening of the ink supply part; and (c) a pressed portion provided on a back surface at the rear side in the mounting direction when the ink cartridge is in the mounting posture and configured to be pressed by the pressing member. The supply valve mechanism includes a supply valve member for opening and closing the second opening of the ink supply part and a supply urging member for urging the supply valve member to a direction of closing the second opening of the ink supply part. The urging force of the supply urging member is adapted to be smaller than the resilient force of the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion.

Description

DESCRIPTION
INK CARTRIDGE, INKJET RECORDING APPARATUS AND
THEREOF
Technical Field The present invention relates to an ink cartridge and inkjet record more specifically, to an ink cartridge and inkjet recording apparatus which c a state in which the ink cartridge is mounted, and can prevent the mk cartrid damaged Background Art As disclosed in JP-A-2003-25608, an inkjet pπnter in which containers are inserted and mounted in the horizontal direction is known exit is formed on a front-end side surface of the ink container in the directio a fluid inlet port corresponding to the tower-shaped ink exit is formed on a surface of the inkjet printer so as to project toward the ink container Whe is inserted and mounted in the horizontal direction to a predetermined po printer, the tower-shaped ink exit and the fluid inlet port are connected, which the ink in the ink container can be supplied to the inkjet printer is ach
As disclosed in JP-A-2004-2911246, an ink cartridge provided w for blocking by a resilient force of a coil spring a flow path in an ink supply ink in the ink cartridge outward spring is known The valve device include opening and closing a supply port of the ink supply part, and the ink flow urging the valve body by the coil spπng in the direction of closing the s other hand, opening of the ink flow path is achieved by a supply needle pro type recording apparatus entering into the supply port and pushing the val mk cartridge is mounted
[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2003-25608 (Fig l, Fig 7, etc ) case in which the ink cartridge is mounted in the horizontal direction, there the ink cartridge is detached due to the urging force of the coil spring, cartridge cannot be maintained in a stable state
Therefore, in the ink cartridge which is mounted in the horiz structure may be conceivable in which a fixing mechanism for fixing the i mounted state is provided thereby fixing the ink cartridge at the mounted po since the fixing mechanism may be fixed by an engagement with a surface so as to be capable of resisting the urging force of the coil spring, a loa surface of the ink cartridge, thereby damaging the ink cartridge unless the cartridge itself is increased to some extent Disclosure of the Invention
In order to solve the above-described problems, it is an object o provide an ink cartridge and an lnkjet recording apparatus which can stably in which the ink cartridge is mounted and can prevent the ink cartridg damaged
This object is achieved by an ink cartridge according to claim 1, b an ink cartridge and an lnkjet recording apparatus according to claim 8 recording apparatus according to claim 6 Further advantageous subject-matters of the dependent claims According to one aspect, the ink supply part having the second op entrance of the extracting member on the front side surface in the direction accommodating chamber is provided, and the second opening of the ink sup and closed by the supply valve mechanism The supply valve mecha supply valve member and the supply urging member, and the supply valve by the supply urging member in the direction of closing the second openi flow path is closed Provided on the back surface of the ink cartridge on t the pressing member in the state in which the ink cartridge is stored in t chamber
When the urging force of the supply urging member is adapted to resilient force of the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion, the f direction of detaching the ink cartridge from the accommodating chamber b hence the ink cartridge might be detached by pressing the door When the for fixing the ink cartridge is provided without providing the pressing mechanism is engaged with and hence fixes the surface of the ink cartridge urging force of the supply urging member Therefore, a load is applied t and hence the ink cartridge itself may become damaged
According to another aspect, since the resilient force of the pressin than the urging force of the supply urging member, the ink cartridge is retai force of the pressing member, and hence the ink cartridge is prevented fro the accommodating chamber, so that stable storage and retention are achiev cartridge can be retained by the resilient force of the pressing member, cartridge itself can be prevented in comparison with the case in which t fixed by the fixing mechanism
According to a further aspect, the ink supply part is provided at a le center position of the front side surface, and the pressed portion is provide than the center position of the back surface and higher than a position co ink supply part in the vertical direction of the back surface Here, since t of the door is provided on the lower side of the accommodating chamber, t closes the door member by operating the distal end of the door Therefore, portion is provided on the upper side of the back surface, a working poin member presses the ink cartridge comes apart from the axis of rotation of the user is required to apply a large force to close the door member O not required for operating the door, and the ink cartridge can be main predetermined position
According to an additional aspect, the atmospheric air introduci third opening for introducing atmospheric air into the ink storage chamber front side surface, and the third opening of the atmospheric air introducing closed by the atmospheric air valve mechanism The atmospheric air includes the atmospheric air valve member and the atmospheric air urging atmospheric air valve member is urged by the atmospheric air urging mem of closing the third opemng, and hence the flow path of the atmospheπc ai the resultant urging force of the urging force of the supply urging mem force of the atmospheric air urging member is adapted to be smaller than th the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion^ even when th introducing part is provided with the valve mechanism, the ink cartri retained According to a further aspect, when the ink cartridge is mounted to accommodating chamber, the pressing member abuts against the presse projecting ends of the ink supply part and the atmospheric air introducing p distal end of the accommodating chamber Therefore, since the ink cartr two points on the distal end and one point on the near side, the ink cartrid further stably
According to another aspect, the irradiated portion to which the the optical sensor is irradiated when the ink cartridge is mounted to th apparatus is provided on the front side surface between the ink sup atmospheric air introducing part, and the irradiated portion is located i projecting ends of the ink supply part and the atmospheric air introd mounting direction Therefore, since the irradiated portion does not hit ag According to the inkjet recording apparatus, when the ink cartridge in the accommodating chamber, a state in which the ink can be extr extracting member is achieved by the extracting member entering into pressing the supply valve member The door is provided on the accom with the axis of rotation at the lower side thereof, and the door is provided member for pressing the back surface of the ink cartridge When7 the doo posture, the second opening for the ink cartridge is closed, and hence t retained in the state in which the back surface of the ink cartridge is press member Since the resilient force of the pressing member is adapted to urging force of the supply urging member for urging the supply valve cartridge is retained by the resilient force of the pressing member, so that t prevented from being detached from the accommodating chamber, and retention are achieved Brief Description of Drawings Further features and advantages will arise from the followi embodiments when taken in conjunction with the enclosed drawings, of whi FiG 1 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the multi the present invention FiG 2 is an angled diagram of the refill unit FIG 3 is a side view showing the state in which the door of the refill unit FIG 4 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FiG 5 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the refill unit in Figure 2 alon FIG 6 is an exploded perspective view showing the door of the refill unit FiG 7 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the color i FiG 8 is an angled diagram showing the details of the color ink cartridge
FiG 9 IS a diagram showing the protector, where (a) is a top-surface diagra FiG 13 is an angled diagram showing the details of the large capacity black FiG 14 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir element, where (a) is a fro reservoir element and (b) is a side view of the ink reservoir element
FlG 15 IS a diagram showing the supply path formation part, where (a) is a summary of the supply path formation part (a side view of the fr cross-sectional diagram showing the supply path formation part in the XVb-XVb line, (c) is a diagram showing the state in which the been reduced, and (d) is a diagram showing the completion of the in FiG 16 IS a diagram showing the ambient air path formation part, where diagram showing a summary of the ambient air path formation par showing the ambient air path formation part in Figure 16(a) alon perspective, and (c) is a diagram showing the ambient air path forma
16(a) along the arrow XVIc perspective
FiG 17 IS a diagram showing the injection path formation part, where showing a summary of the injection path formation part, and (b) i diagram of the injection path formation part in Figure 17(a) along line FiG 18 IS a diagram showing the detection part vicinity, where (a) is a di summary of the detection part vicinity, (b) is a cross-sectional diagra part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIb-XVIIIb line, and (c) is a cross- of the detection part in Figure 18(a) along the XVIIIc-XVIIIc line FlG 19 is a diagram showing the sensor arm, where (a) is a front view of t
(b) is a diagram showing the sensor arm in Figure 19(a) along perspective FiG 20 is a diagram showing one part of the ink reservoir element, wher showing the side of the ink reservoir element, (b) is a diagram showi is a diagram showing the supply cap, where (a) is a diagram show supply cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side surface of the supply along the arrow XXIIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the pl supply cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the supp cross-sectional diagram of the supply cap in Figure 23 (c) along t line is a diagram showing the supply joint, where (a) is a diagram show supply joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the su diagram showing the bottom surface of the supply joint, and (d) i diagram of the supply joint in Figure 24(b) along the XXIVd-XXIV is a diagram showing the supply valve, where (a) is a diagram s the supply valve, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the supply val along the arrow XXVb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the pl supply valve, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the su is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply valve in Figure 25(c) alon line is a diagram showing the first supply spring, where (a) is a diagra of the first supply spring, (b) is a diagram showing the planar s supply spring, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram of the first supply spring in Figu
XXVId-XXVId line is a diagram showing the supply slider, where (a) is a diagram sh the supply slider, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the supply sli along the arrow XXVIIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing the the supply slider, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the
(e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the supply slider in Figure check valve, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the ch diagram showing the bottom surface of the check valve, and (c) i diagram of the check valve in Figure 29(a) along the XXIXd-XXIX is a diagram showing the cover, where (a) is a diagram showing th (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface of the cover, (c) is a dia bottom surface of the cover, and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram of t
30(b) along the XXXd-XXXd line IS a diagram showing the ambient air cap, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air cap, (b) is a diagram showing the side of the ambien 31 (a) along the arrow XXXIb perspective, (c) is a diagram showing of the ambient air cap, (d) is a diagram showing the bottom surface cap, and (e) is a cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air cap in the XXXIe-XXXIe line is a diagram showing the ambient air joint, where (a) is a diagram of the ambient air joint, (b) is a diagram showing the planar surface joint, (c) is a diagram showing the bottom surface of the ambient air cross-sectional diagram of the ambient air joint in Figure
XXXIId-XXXIId line IS a diagram showing the ambient air valve, where (a) is a diagram s the ambient air valve, and (b) is a diagram showing the bottom surf air valve is a partial cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which mechanism and the ambient air intake mechanism have been asse supply unit and the ambient air intake unit is a diagram showing the manufacturing processes prior to welding is a diagram showing the welding processes for the film, where injection process FIG 38 is a diagram showing the attachment process for the case, wher showing the process to sandwich the frame part by the case, an showing the welding process to weld the case FiG 39 IS a diagram showing the manufacturing processes that are p shipment of the ink cartridge, where (a) is a diagram showing the pr protective cap, and (b) is a diagram showing the process to packag using the packaging unit
FiG 40 is a diagram showing the method of attaching the ink cartridge to device
FiG 41 is a diagram showing the state in which the ink cartridge has be multifunction device FIG 42 is a diagram showing the operation of the sensor arm correspondin ink remaimng within the ink reservoir chamber, where (a) shows there is ink remaining, and (b) shows the state in which there is no in
FlG 43 is a diagram showing the operation theory of the sensor arm diagr FIG 44 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink attached to the multifunction device 1 in the wrong orientation
FIG 45 is a diagram showing the method of removing the ink cartridg recording device
FiG 46 is a diagram showing the front perspective of the ink cartridge and t is removed from the multifunction device FiG 47 is a diagram showing the structure to reduce adherence of the ink surface of the detection part of the ink cartridge, where (a) shows the ink cartridge has been removed from the refill unit, (b) is a dia surface on which the detection part is formed on the ink cartridge, a i
(a) is a cross-sectional diagram showing a summary of the case in the XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa line, and (b) is a cross-sectional di summary of the case in Figure 48(b) along the XXXXIXb-XXXXIX is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which each ink attached within the case is a diagram showing the combination of the case members diagra is a diagram showing the ink cartridge and refill unit accordi example of embodiment, where (a) is a diagram showing the side o according to the second example of embodiment, and (b) is a dia cross-section of the state in which the ink cartridge has been attach unit is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink c to the third and fourth examples of embodiment, where (a) is a showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge according to th embodiment, and (b) is an angled diagram showing the external app cartridge according to the fourth example of embodiment IS an angled diagram showing the ink cartridge according to the embodiment is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink cart the sixth example of embodiment has been attached within the refill is a block diagram showing a summary of the electrical structure o device according to the sixth example of embodiment is a flowchart showing the ink cartridge attachment detection proce by the CPU of embodiment FiG 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink c to the tenth example of embodiment
FiG 62 is an exploded perspective diagram showing the ink cartridge acc example of embodiment
FiG 63 is a diagram showing the interchange procedure for the iiik reserv
FiG 64 IS a diagram showing the ink reservoir unit according to the ele embodiment
FiG 65 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of t FiG 66 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of t FIG 67 is a diagram showing a modified example of the combination of th Best Mode for Carrying Out the Invention
Preferable embodiments of the present invention will be describ reference to the attached drawings Figure 1 is an oblique view showing multifunction device 1 in which ink cartridge 14 of the present invention is i
Printer part 11 is provided on the lower part of multifunction device 1, a is provided on the upper part of this printer part 11 Multifunction device 1
Function Device) in which printer part 11 and scanner part 12 are provide has various functions such as a printer function, scanner function, c facsimile function
Multifunction device 1 is primarily connected to a computer (external in the figure), and it records images or documents to recording paper us medium based on image data or document data sent from this computer M
1 can also be connected to an external device such as a digital camera (no figure) such that it records image data outputted from the digital camera t
Moreover, by using receiver 2, multifunction device 1 can communicate figure) that discharges ink drops in advance, is equipped at the base of t multifunction device 1 Refill unit 13 has a compact design and is config cartridge 14 can be easily replaced, and this will be described in detail belo
Scanner part 12 is equipped with document bed 15, which functions a Scanner), and document cover 16, which is provided on the upper part of 15 (top of figure 1) Document cover 16 is equipped with automatic docu Auto Document Feeder, called "ADF" hereafter) 17, and it is attached t document bed 15 (back side of Figure 1) using a hmge such that it can be closed Therefore, document cover 16 is opened and closed by rotating i arrow A with respect to document bed 15 In this embodiment, document b portion of the housing of multifunction device 1, and document cover 16 co of the top surface of multifunction device 1
Document bed 15 is equipped with a contact glass sheet (not illustr between the document bed and document cover 16, and it is equipped with unit (not illustrated in the figure) on the inside A document is placed b cover 16 and the contact glass sheet, and the image reading unit reads document by moving along the contact glass sheet from the bottom of the co
Document cover 16 is equipped with ADF 17, and this ADF 17 is con can consecutively feed up to a prescribed number of documents from do paper ejection tray 19 Moreover, ADF 17 has a known structure, so its d will be omitted In this embodiment, a configuration that is not equipped also be used In this configuration, document cover 16 is opened by the us are placed on the contact glass sheet
Printer part 11 is equipped with an image recording part that has an inkj (not illustrated in the figure), and this is configured as an inkjet recording d 11 is equipped with refill unit 13 on the front side of multifunction devic Moreover, opening/closing cover 20 that opens and closes opening 21 of front surface Ia (end of the front right side in Figure 1) is provided on t refill unit 13 (front of Figure 1) Opening/closing cover 20 is configured freely rotated between a position in which it exposes refill unit 13 through position in which it closes opening 21 and houses refill unit 13 by folding (front direction in Figure 1)
Opening 22 is formed in the center of front surface Ia of multifunctio paper feed tray (not illustrated in the figure) is positioned inside this openi the state in which the paper feed tray is disengaged is illustrated) After t that is sent from the paper feed tray is sent to the back side, it is sent to the to the front side, and images are recorded onto the recording paper while t is fed The recording paper is then discharged to a paper ejection tray (no figure) that is provided on the upper part of the paper feed tray inside openi
Operation panel 30 is attached to the top surface of the front surface sid device 1 (upper part of the front surface in Figure 1) This operation panel part for the purpose of performing the operations of printer part 11 and sca is equipped with various operation keys 31-34 and liquid crystal display pa operation keys 31-34 arranged on operation panel 30 are connected to a c control circuit board, not illustrated in the figure) used as a control mea major functions through flat cables not illustrated in the Figure In addit commands from the various operation keys 31-34, the control device pro from receiver 2 described above and controls the operation of multifunction in cases in which a device such as a personal computer is connected to multi the control device controls the operation of multifunction device 1 based o from this personal computer in addition to the instructions from operation pa
Slot part 23 through which recording media such as various small me view of refill unit 13 Figure 3 is a side view of the state in which door 41 been opened Figure 4 is a cross-sectional view of refill unit 13 through line and the state in which ink cartridges 14 are installed is illustrated Figure 5 i view of refill unit 13 through line V-V of Figure 2, and the state in which in installed is illustrated Figure 6 is an exploded perspective view of door 4 Figures 3 and 4 illustrate the state in which needle forming member 48 is re
As illustrated in Figure 2, refill unit 13 is primarily equipped with case cartridges 14 are inserted and removed, and door 41, which is connected to 40 is formed into a roughly rectangular parallelepiped on the whole, an Figure 4, accommodating chambers 50 (housing parts) that house and hol are partitioned and formed on the inside In this embodiment, c accommodating chambers 50, and four ink cartridges 14 are inserted into each accommodating chamber 50 The inner wall surface shape of eac chamber 50 is formed such that it demarcates space corresponding to the o cartridge 14, and when each ink cartridge 14 is installed in case 40, it is h without rattling
As illustrated in Figure 2, case 40 is equipped with bottom plate part 4 43 that are provided on the left and right sides of this bottom plate part 42 on the back left side is not illustrated in Figure 2), and ceiling plate part 44 such that it spans the space between each side plate part 43, and the inside chambers 50 is further equipped with partition wall parts 47 (see Figure each accommodating chamber 50 The number of these partition wall pa determined by the number of ink cartridges 14 housed in case 40, and the they are arranged are determined by the thicknesses of ink cartridges 14 in t As illustrated in Figure 4, partition walls 47 are formed in a rib shape pro and bottom of bottom plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 Further, parti ink cartridges 14 is formed on needle forming member 48 based on t cartridges 14 housed in accommodating chambers 50 of case 40
As illustrated in Figure 5, needle 49 extends along the direction of ope and in a roughly horizontal direction (ink cartridge installation direction) in needle forming member 48 is engaged with cutout part 40a When an i installed in an accommodating chamber 50, this needle 49 is inserted into i (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, and an ink supply path is formed as sup Figure 22) of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) is pressed Needle with ink extraction opening 52 that projects upward on the back side of cas Figure 5), and ink tube 53 is connected to this ink extraction opening connected to an inkjet recording head (not illustrated in the figure), and it is ink inside ink cartridges 14 to the inkjet recording head
Passage 54, which introduces ambient air into ink cartridges 14, is form of case 40, which forms the top of needle 49 (top of Figure 5) When cartridges 14 is extracted through needle 49, ambient air corresponding to passes through passage 54 and is supplied into ink cartridges 14
Further, protrusion 55 that projects to the ink cartridge 14 side (left si formed on the top of passage 54 This protrusion 55 is a guide protrusion case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 described below (see Figure 8) More cartridge 14 is about to be installed upside-down, the upside-down inserti 14 is prevented by this protrusion 55 A detailed description of this backwards insertion of ink cartridge 14 is given below A detailed descript structure of ink cartridge 14 is also given below
On the back side of case 40, remaining ink detection sensor 57, which of the ink liquid level (remaining ink) inside ink cartridge 14, is provided and passage 54 This remaining ink detection sensor 57 is a transmissive accommodating chamber 50 (See Figure 18(b)) Remaining ink detec connected to a control device, and the amount of remaining ink stored in ea is constantly monitored by this control device
Rib 44a is provided on ceiling plate part 44, and this improves the ri Further, ceiling plate part 44 is equipped with swing arm mechanism 44b attached between swing arm mechanism 44b and ceiling plate' part 4 mechanism 44b is always elastically biased in the direction of door 41 Figure 2, left side of Figures 3-5) Swing arm mechanism 44b is configured that project into case 40 (accommodating chamber 50) engage with latch p (see Figure 8) of ink cartridge 14, for example, in the state in which it is el is therefore possible to reliably hold ink cartridge 14 that is installed in case
Opening 45 is provided on the front surface of case 40 (insertion hole cartridge 14 is installed) This opening 45 is provided on each of th chambers 50 In other words, each accommodating chamber 50 is succ inside case 40 on each opening 45, and the four ink cartridges 14 are respec and removed from each accommodating chamber 50 through openings 45
Door 41 opens and closes opemng 45, and is provided on each openin of door 41 switches between a position in which it closes opemng 45 (bl with the 1st, 3rd and 4th door 41 from the back in figure 2 and a position opening 45 (open position), as with the 2nd door 41 from the back left opening 45 can thereby be opened and closed When door 41 is in the blo cartridge 14 is reliably held inside accommodating chamber 50, and when open position, ink cartridge 14 can be easily inserted into and removed fro chamber 50 Here, the structure of door 41 will be described in detail with reference
41 is equipped with door main body 60, pressing retaining member 61 that i the shape of opening 45 of case 40 Rotating shaft part 64, which is supp part of the front surface of case 40, is formed on the bottom end of d (bottom side end in Figure 6) Specifically, bearing part 42a is formed o bottom plate part 42 of case 40 (see Figures 2, 3, and 4), and rotating sh into this bearing part 42a such that it can rotate freely As a result, door close opening 45 by standing up or open opening 45 by folding over
Pullout member 65, which is formed as a unit with door main body 60, bottom end of door main body 60 This pullout member 65 is roughly form and it has extension part 65a and curved part 65b Extension part 65a is suc on the bottom end of door main body 60 (rotating shaft part 64), and c successively provided forming an approximately 90° angle with extension p
When door 41 is in the blocked position (state illustrated in Figure 4) part 65b projects even further upwards than installation surface 51 o chamber 50 (bottom surface inside accommodating chamber 50 that make bottom surface of ink cartridge 14, see Figure 4) Door main body 60 rotat shaft part 64 as a rotational center, and as a result, pullout member 65 th L-shape also rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational cente changes to the open position (state illustrated in Figure 3), curved part 65b 65 rotates around rotating shaft part 64 as a rotational center At this time, rotation of curved part 65b, outer wall surface 65c changes from a state roughly perpendicularly (state illustrated in Figure 4) to a roughly hori illustrated in Figure 3) The length of extension part 65a of pullout mem prescribed dimension, so when curved part 65b is rotated, outer wall surf higher than installation surface 51 of case 40 and is roughly parallel to instal Outer wall surface 65c functions as a guide surface that guides ink installation surface 51 mside accommodating chamber 50 m the state in w width direction Moreover, in this embodiment, the spacing between e members 65 is set to be smaller than the width direction of ink cartridge 14
Claw 61a is provided on both sides of pressing retaining member 61 su to the outside from the side surface, and claw accommodating part 60a, in housed, is provided on door main body 60 Claw accommodating part 60a a groove that extends in a direction that is roughly perpendicular to the lon of door mam body 60 (vertical direction in Figure 6) Claw 61a is accommodating part 60a such that it can slide freely, so pressing retain supported such that it can advance and retreat in a direction that is pe longitudinal direction of door mam body 60 In other words, pressing ret can change positions between a projected position in which it is raised from of door main body 60 (state illustrated in Figure 3) and a retreated positi retreated from the projected position to the side of door main body 60 ( Figure 4) Moreover, coil spring 66 is placed between pressing retaimng m main body 60 Therefore, pressing retaining member 61 is elastically bia always in the projected position
When door 41 is in the blocked position, pressing retaining member with the side surface of ink cartridge 14 and is displaced to the retreated p relatively pressed by ink cartridge 14 (state illustrated in Figure 4) As a r 14 receives the elastic force of coil spring 66 through pressing retaining pressed against the back side of case 40 (back side of the direction in which installed) Therefore, ink cartridge 14 is held in a state in which it is positio case 40
In this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is formed in the sh while wall surface 61b of this pressing retaining member 61 (surface that the side surface of ink cartridge 14 when door 41 is in the blocked positio r
19
provided in a position in which it makes contact and presses downwar position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 This is for the purpos operationality in the case in which the user operates door 41 For exam retaining member 61 is positioned at or above the center position in the v ink cartridge 14, the user operates door 41 by holding it in the vicinity of lo so the distance between the part that is operated by the user and the member 61 becomes small Therefore, the force induced by coil spri retaimng member 61 becomes large, and a force that is large enough t therefore becomes necessary On the other hand, when pressing retaini positioned below the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartrid between the part that is operated by the user and pressing retaining member user is able to operate door 41 with a small amount of force Moreov retaining member 61 is positioned too far downward in the vertical directi 14, it presses against the end of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 somet accommodating chamber 50, making it unable to hold ink cartridge 14 corr this embodiment, pressing retaining member 61 is positioned slightly position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, so ink cartridge 14 held correctly and can be installed smoothly with a small amount of forc below the center position in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14 mean the vertical direction of pressing retaimng member 61 is positioned even lo in the vertical direction of ink cartridge 14, and as long as this positio maintained, a portion of the top end of pressing retaining member 61 (uppe may be above the center position of ink cartridge 14
Moreover, as wijl be described below, ink cartridge 14 of this embod with ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 on the side surfac surface that makes contact with pressing retaining member 61, and this in embodiment is set such that it is larger than the elastic force of the valve supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 As a result, when ink cartri inside accommodating chamber 50, the ink inside ink cartridge 14 is reli ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink cartridge 14 Moreover, ink on the bottom end and ambient air intake part 130 is on the top part in the ink cartridge 14 is installed in accommodating chamber 50, so pressing ret presses against a position that is relatively close to the center position in th of ink cartridge 14 Therefore, in comparison to the case in which it presse top or bottom end of ink cartridge 14, the direction in which the momentu ink cartridge 14 can be stabilized and held
Door lock member 62 is attached to the top end of door main unit 60 ( in Figure 6) Door lock member 62 has main shaft part 62a, key part 62b t direction of the mside of case 40 continuing from the upper end of main sh side of Figure 6), and seat part 62c (contact part) that projects in the directio case 40 continuing from the lower end of mam shaft part 62a (lower side of
Door lock member 62 is supported such that it can advance and retr direction with respect to door main body 60 (vertical direction in Figure extends in the vertical direction on the top end of door main body 60 Slide extends in the vertical direction, is provided on main shaft part 62a of doo Slide rail 60b of door main body 60 is inserted into this slide groove 6 member 62 is configured such that it can freely slide up and down
Claw 62e is provided on the bottom part of both sides of key part 62b 62a When door lock member 62 is fitted into door main unit 60, claw 62e accommodating part 60c provided on door main body 60 This claw accom is configured from a groove that extends to exactly a prescribed length in th Therefore, when door lock member 62 slides upward or downward, claw lock member 62 is in the position in which it projects upward from the main body 60 When door lock member 62 slides downward with respect 60 and claw 62e makes contact with the bottom edge of the inside wa accommodating part 60c, door lock member 62 is in the position in whic inside of door main body 60 In this specification, the position at which do makes contact with the top edge of the inside wall surface of claw accomm defined as the "projected position", and the position at which door lock contact with the bottom edge of claw accommodating part 60c is define position" Coil spring 67 (elastic member) is placed between door lock member body 60 Therefore, door lock member 62 is elastically biased such that upward from door main body 60 - in other words, in the direction in whic the projection position
The top surface of key part 62b of door lock member 62 is a sloped downward Therefore, when door 41 changes from the open position to the the top surface of door lock member 62 makes contact with the top edge of 40, and when door 41 is rotated towards the blocked position, door lock me the inside of door main body 60 as it is relatively pressed against the top e When door 41 then completely changes to the blocked position, door loc again projects from door main body 60, and key part 62b engages with th 40
At this time, key part 62b of door lock member 62 is in a state in whi lock member fitting part 46 (see Figures 2 and 5), which is provided o opening 45 of case 40 Door lock member 62 is elastically biased such that from door main body 60 due to coil spring 67, so it is pressed inside lock 46, but the position of door lock member 62 is an intermediate position s This accommodating part 6Od consists of a concave part that is provided o 60 This will be described below, and when lock release lever 63 chan release lever 63 is fitted into accommodating part 6Od
Supporting pin 63a is provided on the bottom end of lock release lev time, pin support hole 6Oe, into which supporting pin 63 a is fitted, is prov body 60 Because supporting pin 63 a is fitted into this pm support hole 6Oe, 63 is configured such that it can rotate freely around the rotational center 63 a Specifically, lock release lever 63 is configured such that it can be displaced between a position that is roughly parallel to the outer surface of a position in which it is inclined at approximately 45° (degrees) (state of do of Figure 2), and a position in which it is folded over roughly horizontall door 41 from the right side of Figure 2) by moving the lever In this specifi of lock release lever 63 when it is housed mside accommodating part 6O "housed position", and the position of lock release lever 63 when lock r inclined at approximately 45° is defined as the "neutral position", while t release lever 63 when it is folded over roughly horizontally is defin position"
The bottom end of lock release lever 63 is interlocking cam 63b, and int is for sliding door lock member 62 up and down when the position of loc changes Because interlocking cam 63b is provided, when lock release l from the housed position, through the neutral position, and to the folded p member 62 slides from the projected position, through the intermediate p retreated position Put the other way around, when door lock member 62 position, lock release lever 63 is placed in the housed position and door 4 the state in which door lock member 62 makes contact with lock member case 40, lock release lever 63 can be freely displaced between the house the state in which door 41 is closed (state illustrated in Figure 4), loc attempts to further rotate door lock member 62 through interlocking cam pressing downward However, door lock member 62 is always elastically coil spring 67, so door lock member 62 is not displaced by the action of release lever 63 alone, and door lock member 62 is maintained in the interm
However, when lock release lever 63 is forcibly rotated - for exam which a user attempting to replace ink cartridge 14 operates and rotates lock lock release lever 63 is rotated and displaced to the folded position When 63 is displaced to the folded position, interlocking cam 63b rotates and ch centered on supporting pin 63 a and presses seat part 62c of door lock mem As a result, door lock member 62 moves downward in opposition to the e spring 67 and is displaced to the retreated position When door lock membe the retreated position, the lock of door 41 is released, and this door 41 blocked position to the open position Door lock member 62 constantly receives the elastic force of coil sp rotational force that acts upon lock release lever 63 disappears - in other releases his or her hand from lock release lever 63 - door lock memb position in which it projects most from door main body 60, and lock r forcibly displaced to the housed position In other words, when door 41 is i lock release lever 63 is in the position in which it is almost completely h main body 60 Therefore, when replacing ink cartridge 14, because lock completely housed inside door main unit 60, rotating is possible with rotati the center of rotation to the point that door 41 is nearly horizontal, so t replace ink cartridge 14 Moreover, the two strips 61c that are provided on pressing retaining member 61 also operate as guides when housing ink c accommodating chamber 50 in cooperation with a guide part between cu When multifunction device 1 is in normal use, door 41 of refill unit 13 release lever 63 is placed in the neutral position Therefore, as illustrated opening/closing cover 20 is opened when replacing ink cartridge 14, loc slopes to the front surface side As a result, there is the advantage that t operate lock release lever 63 Incidentally, as illustrated in Figure 1, refill u front surface Ia of multifunction device 1, so if lock release lever '63 is pl position (if it slopes to the front surface side), then it is necessary for a enough to accommodate refill unit 13 to be secured inside multifunction d it is necessary for refill unit 13 to be placed further back from the rim of op in the risk that the external dimensions of multifunction device 1 will beco in this embodiment, lock release lever 63 can rotate freely between the n the housed position when door 41 is in the blocked position with respect t unit 13 can be placed in the vicinity of the πm of opening 21 This is be unit 13 placed on the rim of opening 21, the inside wall surface of openin makes contact with lock release lever 63 when opening/closing cover 20 is opening/closing cover 20 is completely closed, lock release lever 63 is displ position as it is pressed by opening/closing cover 20 Therefore, in th compact design for multifunction device 1 can be realized
Next, ink cartridges 14 that are used in this embodiment will be descri to Figures 7 to 13 Ink cartridges 14 are for the purpose of storing ink in a magenta, yellow, and black colored ink is stored in each ink cartridge 1 regard to the structure of each ink cartridge 14, ink cartridge 14 that stores b such that it is slightly thicker than the ink cartridges 14 that store the other is because the demand for black ink is generally the highest and it is quantities and because black ink consists of pigmented inks, while color dyed inks, so when black ink is mixed with colored ink, large quantities o a diagram showing protector 300, and (a) is a top surface view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while (b) is a cross-sectional view of pro line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a) In the following description, the X-direc longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir e Y-direction indicates the height direction of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink 100), which is orthogonal to the X-direction, and the Z-direction indicates t (thickness direction) of ink cartridge 14 (case 200, ink reservoir eleme orthogonal to the X-direction and the Y-direction Arrow B illustrated in Fi the X-direction, which indicates the longitudinal direction of ink cartridge 1 the direction in which ink cartridge 14 is installed into refill unit 13
As illustrated in Figure 7, colored ink cartridge 14 is equipped wit covers roughly the entire body of ink reservoir element 100 that stores ink ( protector 300, which is attached to this case 200 and protects ink reservoir ink cartridge 14 is fed As is clear from Figure 7, case 200 is formed parallelepiped that contains a pair of largest surfaces 210a and 220a that o (cases 1200 and 2200 explained below are the same) In this embodim element 100, case 200, protector 300, and all of the members contained i described below are formed from resin materials and do not contain metal can be burned at the time of disposal For example, nylon, polyester, or pol used as resin materials
As illustrated in Figure 8, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipp 110, which forms ink reservoir chamber 111 that stores ink (inner space a including ink reservoir chamber 111), ink supply part 120, which supplies frame part 110 to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), ambient air intak introduces ambient air into frame part 110, detection part 140 (irradiat provided in order to detect the amount of remaining ink stored inside fr 100 from above and below (top and bottom of Figure 8, Z-direction) First is a member that covers the bottom side surface of ink reservoir element 1 second case element 220 is a member that covers the top side surface of in 100 in Figure 8 First and second case members 210 and 220 are made of r are manufactured using injection molding The depths of first and second and 220 (lengths in the upward direction of Figure 8 (lengths in the Z-dire such that they are roughly equivalent, and they are formed such that the su roughly equivalent to the thickness of ink reservoir element 100 As a r between ink reservoir element 100 and the inside surface of case 200 beco becomes narrow), so even if pressure were applied inward from the outsid amount of deformation of case 200 would become small, so it would be pos damage of case 200
First case member 210 comprises a plate-shaped part that forms larges vertical wall parts 210b-210e that are provided in roughly orthogonal d directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portions of the plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 210d-210e, the vertical protector 300 side of first case member 210 is 210b, the vertical wall that this vertical wall part 210b is 210c, and the vertical walls that are respecti vertical wall parts 210c and 210b are vertical wall parts 21Od and 21Oe Figure 8 is vertical wall part 21Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is vertical w
Two case cutout parts 211 and 212 for the purpose of exposing ink su ambient air intake part 130 to the outside of case 200 are formed on vertical first case member 210 Case cutout parts 211 and 212 are formed into ro shapes from the edges of vertical wall part 210b, and case cutout part 211 side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ink supply part 120, while ca on the left back side of Figure 8 is a cutout corresponding to ambient ai connecting to case cutout part 212 of first case member 210 Because the 212a and 212b are provided, the alignment of ink reservoir element 1 member 210 becomes easy
Moreover, two case projecting parts 214a and 214b, which project i protector 300 (left front direction and X-direction in Figure 8) from the sur cutout parts 211-213 are formed (vertical wall part 210b), are formed on 210 Case projecting parts 214a and 214b are formed on both sides of first in the Y-direction (right front side end and left back side end of Figure sandwich case cutout parts 211 to 213, and the ink supply part 120 side ( Figure 8) is case projecting part 214a, while the ambient air intake part 1 side of Figure 8) is case projecting part 214b Case projecting part 214a h 214a2, which slopes in the direction of case cutout parts 211 to 213 (directi first case member 210) towards the edge from the portion that connects to t of vertical wall part 21Od of the case member 210 (protector 300 direction, in Figure 8) When ink cartridge 14 is to be installed into multifunction de 1), it is installed such that case projecting part 214a is on the bottom side case in which ink cartridge 14 is installed, when sloping surface 214a2 bottom wall part 41 of refill unit 13, ink cartridge 14 is smoothly led installation position due to its slope On case projecting part 214a, case projecting cutout part 214al, whic rectangular shape, is formed on the inside surface that forms the side of cas to 213 On case projecting part 214b, Case projecting cutout part 214bl, w into a rectangular shape, is also formed on the inside surface that forms the parts 211 to 213 These case projecting cutout parts 214al and 214bl are pr prevent the natural desorption of protector 300 in the state in which protect to case 200, and protruding parts 330al and 330bl of protector 300, which (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Od on the ink supply p front side of Figure 8) and determines the position of ink reservoir element case 200, and rod members 215b and 215c, which protrude in the directi member 220 (Z-direction) in the vicinity of vertical wall part 21Oe on the part 130 side (left back side of Figure 8) and determine the position of ink sealed inside case 200, are formed on first case member 210 The positio element 100 is determined by the three locations of these rod members 215 can prevent the attachment of ink reservoir element 100 in mistaken directio
Second case member 220 compπses a plate-shaped part that forms la and vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe that are provided in roughly ort (vertical directions and Z-direction in Figure 8) from the outer edge portion of this plate-shaped part Regarding vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe, the forms the protector 300 side of second case member 220 is 220b, the v placed opposite this vertical wall part 220b is 220c, and the vertical walls th connected to vertical wall parts 220c and 220b are vertical wall parts 22Od side of Figure 8 is vertical wall part 22Od, and the left side of Figure 8 is 22Od)
Second case member 220 has a symmetrical structure that is roughly s case member 210 As with first case member 210, three case cutout par formed on vertical wall part 220b, and contact groove 221a connected to ca and contact groove 222a connected to case cutout part 222 are also formed 221 and 222 are formed into the same shapes as case cutout parts 211 an member 210 (roughly semicircular shapes), and case cutout part 223 is for shape as case cutout part 213 of first case member 210 (roughly rectangular case projecting parts 224a and 224b are formed on both sides of case cutou and case projecting part 224a has sloping surface 224a2 that slopes in the which rod members 215a-215c fit after passing through in the direction of 210 (Z-direction) corresponding to the positions at which rod members 21 case member 210 are formed
As described above, first case member 210 and second case ember 22 formed into roughly the same shapes, and when they are in the state in w reservoir element 100, roughly circular through-holes that expose a portion 120 to the outside are formed by case cutout parts 211 and 221, whil through-holes that expose a portion of ambient air intake part 130 to the out case cutout parts 212 and 222 Through-holes into which remaining ink d (see Figure 5) can be inserted are formed on both sides of detection part 14 bottom sides in Figure 8, both sides in the Z-direction) by case cutout hole the side wall of detection part 140 Further, a protrusion ("first projectin projecting part") that contributes to the prevention of ink contamination o prevention of the installation of the cartridge into refill unit 13 in the wron prevention of the damage of ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par case projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a, and a protrusion ( part", or "one projecting part") that contπbutes to the prevention of th installation in the wrong position together with the protrusion that is projecting part 214a and case projecting part 224a and the prevention of th such as ink supply part 120 is formed by case projecting part 214b and c 224b These protrusions will be described in detail below Moreover, as is cl ink supply part 120 is positioned closer to the protrusion formed from ca 214a and case projecting part 224a than the protrusion formed by case pr and case projecting part 224b A through-hole into which projecting part 300 (see Figure 9) is loosely inserted is formed by case projecting cutou 224a 1, and a through-hole into which projecting part 330bl of protector 30 details such as case projecting parts 214a, 214b, 224a, and 224b and case 213 and 221 to 223 also have the same shapes Therefore, when first cas second case member 220 are resm-molded, their die shapes are similar, s with die design can be reduced Next, the external shape of case 200 will be described On first and sec
210 and 220, vertical wall parts 21Od, 21Oe, 22Od, and 22Oe (side surface directions (Y-direction) that are orthogonal to longitudinal directio connecting the πght back side of Figure 8 and the left front side of Fig Figure 8) are formed into concave shapes, and steps are formed with surfaces 210a and 220a (surfaces) of first and second case members 210 second case members 210 and 220 are welded to these step portions, element 110 is fastened to case 200 Regarding these step portions, the st side of ink supply part 120 (right front side of Figure 8) are first case wel 226, and the step portions on the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left b 8) are second case welded parts 217 and 227
In the following explanation, longitudinal direction B of first and sec 210 and 220 (direction parallel to the X-direction) refers to the longitudin cartridge 14, the longitudinal direction or ink reservoir element 100, an direction of case 200 Here, first and second case welded parts 226 and 227 of second case 220
First case welded part 226 is connected to case projecting part 224a in the s the opposite side as case projecting part 224a, it has concave part 226a, whi concave shape in the direction of the inside of second case member 220, an 226b that engages with pullout member 65 of door 41 (see Figure 6) when removed from refill unit 13 (see Figure 1) Concave part 226a is a regio oscillating range when pullout member 65 rotates Case welded part 227 h engagement part 226b, and latch part 227a of second case member 220, a first case member 210
Next, protector 300 will be described with reference to Figures 8 an diagram that shows protector 300, and Figure 9(a) is a top view of prote perspective of IXa in Figure 8, while Figure 9(b) is a cross-sectional vie through line IXb-IXb in Figure 9(a) Protector 300 is a member for protecti 120 and ambient air intake part 130, in particular, of ink reservoir elem cartridge 14 is shipped Protector 300 is made from a resin material and is injection molding As illustrated in Figure 8, protector through-hole 310 is formed on location corresponding to the side of ambient air intake part 130 (left back s the bottom surface This is because valve open part 721a for operating am (see Figure 33) projects outward from ambient air intake part 130, and prot 310 is formed in order to protect this valve open part 721a As illustrated in the top view of Figure 9(a), first protector fitting part 3 into the fitting groove formed by case fitting grooves 214b2 and 224b2 formed in the vicinity of the end of the side of protector through-hole 31 (left side in Figure 9(a)) Second protector fitting part 330a, which through-hole formed by case projecting cutout parts 214al and 224al ( fastens protector 300 to case 200, is formed in the vicinity of the end of th the side on which first protector fitting part 320 is formed (right side in second protector fitting part 330b, which is fitted into the through-hol projecting cutout holes 214bl and 224b 1 (see Figure 8) and fastens protecto is provided between first protector fitting part 320 and protector through-hol Moreover, protector loose insertion parts 340a and 340b, which are li the through-holes formed by case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the side wal the strength of protector 300
First protector fitting part 320 is positioned such that it extends in a dir direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C of protector 300 (vertical 9(a), X-direction), and consists of protector vertical wall 321 provided fro of protector 300 and two protector vertical walls 322 that are connected to t opposite side as protector through-hole 310 from protector vertical wall Figure 9(a)) As illustrated in Figure 9(b), each protector vertical wall 32 part formed parallel to protector vertical wall 321 from the top end of fir part 320 (top side end in Figure 9(b)) and a bottom part connected to the sid 300 from a roughly intermediate position in the projecting direction of fir part 320 (upward in Figure 9(b), X-direction), and they have steps
As a result, when fitted into the fitting groove formed by case fitting g 224b2 (see Figure 8), protector vertical wall 321 and the top of protector ve inserted into the fitting groove When first protector fitting part 320 is inser groove, it is inserted as it is restricted by both ends of protector vertica extends in the Z-direction orthogonal to longitudinal direction C (Y-directi protector vertical wall 322 in longitudinal direction C Here, if first protect is formed with roughly the same shape as the fitting groove formed by c 214b2 and 224b2 (see Figure 8), the attachment of protector 300 takes tim protector fitting part 320 is extremely small in comparison to the fitting gr of the attachment direction of protector 300 cannot be determined How inserted as it is restricted by protector vertical walls 321 and 322 at one surf protector vertical wall 321) and four points (ends of both sides of protecto and two ends of protector vertical wall 322) the installation properties of improved, and mistaken installation can be prevented
As illustrated in Figure 9(b), protruding parts 330al and 330bl, whi removed as second protector fitting parts 330a and 330b are elastically def direction
Here, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with reference to Figures 10 is an oblique view that shows the external appearance of black ink cartr is an exploded oblique view of black ink cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figures 10 and 11, black ink cartridge 14 is config external profile is larger (the thickness (length in the Z-direction) is la colored ink cartridges 14 Specifically, second case member 220, which con is identical to second case member 220 for colored ink, and first case me constitutes case 1200, is formed such that it is thicker (the length in the Z than first case member 210 for colored ink Ink reservoir element 100 has to store black ink, so it is configured with the same shape as colored ink res and uses the same parts Moreover, protector 1300 is formed corresponding it is formed such that it is thicker in the vertical direction (Z-direction) t Therefore, black ink cartridge 14 will be described with regard to first case descriptions of second case member 220, ink reservoir element 100, and p be omitted here Only the depth of first case member 1210 (the thickness of (length of Z-direction) in Figure 11) the differs from that of first case me rest of its configuration is the same, so it detailed description will be omitte As illustrated in Figure 11, first case member 1210 comprises a plat forms largest surface 1210a and vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe tha roughly orthogonal directions (vertical directions and Z-direction in Figure edge portions of the four sides of this plate-shaped part Regarding vertica to 121Oe, the vertical wall that forms the protector 1300 side of first cas 1210b, the vertical wall that is placed opposite this vertical wall part 1210b vertical walls that are respectively connected to vertical wall parts 121 f
34
roughly semicircular shapes on vertical wall part 1210b, are formed on 1210 in order to expose ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake part 13 case 200, and case cutout part 1213, which is cut out into a rectangular between case cutout part 1211 and case cutout part 1212 Two case projecti 1214b are formed on both sides of first case member 1210, and case project sloping surface 1214a2 Rod members 1215a, 1215b and 1215c, which dete of ink reservoir element 100, are formed on first case member 1210
Further, rib 1218 is formed on roughly the entire inside surface of first (roughly the entire largest surface 1210a) This rib 1218 projects in the Z the side of ink reservoir element 100 to the degree that the external pr member 1210 is enlarged with respect to first case member 210 (differ vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe of first case member 210 and vertical w 121Oe of first case member 1210) Because this rib 1218 is provided, the s between ink reservoir element 100 and first case 1210 can be filled It is th maintain the strength of case 1200 against pressure from the outside
Moreover, by making the external profile of black ink cartridge 14 l colored ink cartridge 14, it is possible to differentiate between black ink other ink cartridges 14 Black is a darker color than other colors, so it is not be mistakenly loaded into refill unit 13 and used However, because the black ink cartridge 14 is made large, it can be differentiated from other in mistaken installations can be reduced Further, accommodating chamber 5 13 is formed according to the size of each ink cartridge 14, so black ink ca installed into accommodating chamber 50 corresponding to a colored ink ca
In black ink cartridge 14, the thicknesses of first case member 1210 member 220 in the vertical direction (Z-direction) differ, so ink supply par supply part 130, and detection part 140 are positioned in positions shifte '
35
cartridge 14 is' configured such that it is larger (longer in the Z-direction) black ink cartridges 14 Specifically, the vertical wall heights of vertical 222Oe of second case member 2220 are formed such that they are roughly wall heights of vertical wall parts 220b to 22Oe of second case member 22 member 2220, which constitutes case 2200, is simply made thicker than se 220 for colored and black ink Moreover, in first case member 2210, whi 2200, rib 1218 of first case member 1210 for black ink is simply rem reservoir element 2100 is simply thickened such that the capacity increas colored and black ink reservoir element 100 Therefore, detailed description black ink cartridge 14 will be omitted here For the reference num large-capacity black ink cartridge 14, the reference numeral 2000 is adde numerals attached to colored ink cartridge 14 The thicknesses of first case second case member 2220 in the vertical direction (Z-direction) are roughly supply part 2120, ambient air supply part 2130, and detection part 2140 ar center position in the vertical direction
Corresponding to ink cartridges with the three types of sizes desc desirable for, refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 to be configured such with multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house cored ink cartridge accommodating chamber 50 that selectively houses black ink cartridge 14 black ink cartridge 14 (the inner space of this accommodating chambe corresponding to large-capacity black ink cartridge 14) This is because the printing using only black ink is generally higher than that of color printing of multifunction device 1 in which refill unit 13 is configured such that it multiple accommodating chambers 50 that house colored ink cartridges accommodating chamber 50 that houses black ink cartridge 14 may be prov infrequently use text printing This will be described once again below of ink cartridge 14 (ink reservoir element 100) are horizontal directions, which ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, and detection part on the side surface, ink supply part 120 is positioned on the bottom part si intake part 130 is positioned on the ceiling side Ink reservoir element 21 reservoir element 100 only with regard to its thickness (length in the detailed description will be omitted here
As described above, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily equipped wi ink supply part 120, ambient air intake part 130, detection part 140, ink di and film 160 Moreover, ink reservoir element 100 is configured roughly as The pair of surfaces that constitute the largest area of this hexahedron is the and the back surface side of ink reservoir element 100 illustrated in Fi configured with approximately six surfaces with the side surfaces (side w four directions that connect this front surface side and the back surface surfaces that constitute the largest area of ink reservoir element 100 are par largest surfaces 210a and 220a of case 200 when loaded into case 200 Mo welded to both the front surface side and the back surface side of fram thickness of ink reservoir element 100 (length in the Z-direction), which is shape, can be reduced in comparison to the case in which both sides are materials First, frame part 110 will be described in detail Frame part 110 is injection molding using a resin material, and it has translucence because translucent (or transparent) This is because, as described below, light th light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 positioned detection part 140 is transmitted to light receiving part 57b in order to det remaining ink in ink reservoir element 100
As illustrated in Figure 14(a), outer circumference welded part 400a, are welded surface parts (rib fixed parts or first rib fixed parts), and the fron (blackened portion) of outer circumference welded part 400a is the welded part) on the periphery of first opening 112a Film 160 is welded to this wel ultrasonic welding As illustrated in Figure 14(b), outer circumference welded part 400b,
160 to the vicinity of the outer edge part, and multiple inner circumference to 417b, which are provided on the inside of this outer circumference wel formed on the back surface side of frame part 110 Outer circumference we wall demarcating the interior space of frame 100 Outer circumference wel vertical wall that demarcates the inner space of frame part 100 (space on chamber 111b of ink reservoir chamber 111) Moreover, the blackened edg circumference welded parts (ribs or second ribs) illustrated in Figure 14(b) parts (rib fixed parts or second rib fixed parts) 411b to 417b, and the back (blackened portion) of the outer circumference welded part 400b is the w (fixed part) on the periphery of the opening Film 160 is welded to th ultrasonic welding
The inside of outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b consti chamber 111 m which ink is stored The region on the front surface side il 14(a) is first chamber Il ia of ink reservoir chamber 111, and the region o side illustrated in Figure 14(b) is second chamber 111b of ink reserv Moreover, outer circumference welded part 400a illustrated in Figure 14( 112a of frame part 110, and outer circumference welded part 400b illustrat is second opening 112b of frame part 110
Frame 110 is primarily equipped with supply path forming part 420 (see 14(b)), which communicates with ink supply part 120 and supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside, ambient air communicating passage Here, link forming part 440 partitions first chamber I lia and second ch reservoir chamber 111 in a state in which they communicate with one a linking plate that is between virtual plane R (not illustrated in the figure), that is welded to outer circumference welded part 400a extends, and vi illustrated in the figure), in which film 160 that is welded to outer circumf 400b extends, and extends in a plane parallel to these virtual planes This 440 will be described in detail, m a later process Ambient air passage fo formed such that it is positioned only on the front surface side of frame par chamber Ilia of ink reservoir chamber 111), and it is roughly partitioned which extends parallel to these planes between a portion of outer circumfe 400a and inner circumference welded part 412a and virtual planes R and S communicating passage forming part 430 will be described in detail in a la embodiment, ink reservoir chamber 111 inside frame part 110 (inner space) region containing supply path forming part 420, ambient air communicatin part 430, link forming part 440, and dispensing passage forming part 45 communicating passage forming part 430 is an ambient air passage for in air into ink reservoir chamber 111, so it may alternatively be provided as a ink reservoir chamber 111 of frame part 110 (inner space) This means that reservoir chamber 111 (inner space) described above excluding ambient a passage forming part 430 is essentially considered the space in which ink is
Moreover, on the outer edge of frame part 110, thin plate-shaped pr formed in one location on the bottom part (bottom part of Figure 14(a) a Figure 14(b)) and in two locations on the top part (top part of Figure 14( Figure 14(b)), and through-holes 460a to 460c, into which rod members Figure 8) of first case member 210 described above are inserted, are protruding parts positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of outer circ part 400a, and film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane R)
Inner circumference welded part 411a is provided on supply path formi consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (see Figure 8, left/right directio Inner circumference welded part 412a forms one side wall (vertical wa connection passage 433, which will be described below, in ambient a passage forming part 430, and it consists of a downward-sloping vertical w direction that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 ( circumference welded part 413a is provided in the vicinity of ambient air i it consists of a downward-sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, and a vertical wall that extends wall in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B (vertical direction in Figure 14(a)), which are arranged such that they are Inner circumference welded part 414a is roughly formed into a leftward shape, and it consists of a vertical wall that is parallel to longitudinal directi 110, a vertical wall that extends from this vertical wall in a directio orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, and a downwa wall that slopes from this vertical wall in a direction that intersects with lon B of frame part 110 Inner circumference welded part 415a consists of a v parallel to longitudinal direction B of frame part 110, a vertical wall th perpendicularly such that it faces the direction of the bottom part of frame vertical wall, and a vertical wall that slopes downward from this vertical that intersects with longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (Y circumference welded part 416a is provided in the vicinity of ink dispensi consists of a downward- sloping vertical wall that slopes in a direction t 411a to 417a extends in a direction that slopes downward or is roug longitudinal direction B of frame part 110 (in other words, the botto reservoir chamber 111 in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installe this bottom part side (bottom part side in Figure 14(a)) is a free end As a multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are provided on t circumference welded part 400a in order to suppress the slackening of film is to be welded to frame part 110, these multiple inner circumference we 417a do not significantly inhibit the flow of ink facing ink supply part 12 circumference welded parts 411a to 417a are spread around the inside of o welded part 400a (scattered in multiple units), so they efficiently prevent slack in film 160 and avoid inhibiting the flow of ink
As illustrated in Figure 14(b), regarding inner circumference welded p inner circumference welded part 411b and inner circumference welded part formed with roughly the same shapes as inner circumference welded pa circumference welded parts 413a to 417a described above and in position those of inner circumference welded part 411a and inner circumference we 417a, and only inner circumference welded part 412b is formed with a diffe different position than those of inner circumference welded part 412a Mo surface parts of inner circumference welded parts 411b to 417b are positi virtual plane as that of the welded surface part of outer circumference wel film 160 can be welded on the same plane (virtual plane S)
Inner circumference welded part 412b comprises inner circumference which consists of a vertical wall that extends from outer circumference wel direction that is roughly orthogonal to longitudinal direction B of frame par and inner circumference welded part 412b2, which likewise consists of a extends from outer circumference welded part 400b in a direction that is r corresponding to the back surface side of this ambient air communicatin part 430 Moreover, as with the front surface side, inner circumference we 417b become free ends and are spread around on the back surface side of well (scattered in multiple units), so they efficiently reduce the inhibition suppressing the generation of slack in film 160
Because inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 41 a spread-out orientation (scattered in multiple units), in the case in which from a flexible resin material, it is possible to restrict case defor circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b even if the ca side of ink reservoir element 100 As a result, it is possible to prevent the and the damage of film 160 Further, outer circumference welded parts 4 inner circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b are fo walls that are provided on the front surface side or the back surface s complex dies are not required when frame part 110 is to be injection-mol possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge 14
Next, supply path forming part 420 will be described with reference to 15 is a diagram that shows supply path forming part 420 Figure 15 (a) is a d the outline of supply path forming part 420 (diagram of the back surface 110), Figure 15(b) is a diagram that shows a cross-sectional view of supply 420 through line XVb-XVb in Figure 15 (a), Figure 15(c) is a diagram that which the amount of remaining ink has decreased, and Figure 15(d) is a d the state in which the supply of ink has been completed
As illustrated in Figure 15 (a), supply path forming part 420 is primar first supply communicating hole 421, which communicates with ink suppl partition wall 422, which is formed into a roughly triangular frame when direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 15(a) such that it enclose into a concave shape (stepped shape), plate part 428, which extends from o welded part 400b and supply partition wall 422 and extends parallel to virt between the planes, arm sandwiching part 425, which is provided on the fr 428 and has sensor arm 470 ("displacement member", see Figure 19) th rotating member (descπbed below), and inner circumference welded pa provided in the direction of detection part 140 (see Figure 14(b)) from thi part 425 Moreover, film 160 is welded to supply partition wall 422, and part is positioned on the same virtual plane as the welded surface part of o welded part 400b (virtual plane S) The space enclosed by supply partition part 427 is ink supply chamber 426, which temporarily stores the ink that supply part 120, and the space formed by supply concave part 424 and concave part space 424a As illustrated in Figure 14(b), this concave part s than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (i height direction (Y-direction) of cartridge 14, and it constitutes the portio positioned on the bottommost side (lowest side) of ink reservoir chamber 11 Figure 15(a), first supply communicating hole 421 is formed above bottom height as the top end of recessed space 424a), and second supply communi formed below bottom part 400bl In other words, second supply communi positioned on the lower side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (bottom part side) first supply communicating hole 421 Arm sandwiching part 425 is for leftward-facing C shape when viewed from the direction perpendicular to 15(a), and a portion of the side opposite ink supply part 120 (left side i opened As illustrated in Figures 14(a) and 14(b), welded part 411b and described above are provided such that they face the opposite sides as one part 428
As illustrated in Figure 15(b), supply partition wall 422 is formed su illustrated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) (ink flow path))
Next, ink flow path D, through which ink inside frame part 110 is sup part 120, will be described with reference to Figures 15(c) and 15(d) As il 15(c), when liquid surface I of ink that is stored inside frame 110 is h concave part 424, the ink is supplied to ink supply part 120 through indicated by arrow D in Figure 15(c) In this case, recessed space 424a is the inside of ink supply chamber 426 that is enclosed by supply partitio filled with ink In other words, in the state illustrated in Figure 15(c), ink fil supply chamber 426, so even if liquid surface I of the ink drops b communicating hole 421, the ink can be supplied to ink supply part 12 supply communicating hole 423 In this embodiment, ink supply par cylindπcally shaped, as illustrated in Figure 8, and, as descπbed below, supply mechanism 500 and check valve 670 are housed inside ink supply e shaft part 672 of check valve 670 (see Figure 29) is inserted into first supp hole 421 Therefore, taking into consideration the space occupied by ink 500 and check valve 670, there is a limit to the formation of first supply co 421 on the bottom side of ink reservoir chamber 111 (frame part 110) In which supply partition wall 422 is not provided, when liquid surface I of th first supply communicating hole 421, it becomes impossible to supply the i of the ink mside ink reservoir chamber 111 becomes poor However, by sup partition wall 422 and forming second supply communicating hole 433 o side lower than first supply communicating hole 431 , it is possible to supp surface I of the ink falls below second supply communicating hole 433, s facilitate the full use of the ink When ink is further supplied from the state illustrated in Figure 15(c) a of the ink drops below the upper end of supply concave part 424 and be communicating hole 423 is above part 400bl that forms the bottom pa chamber 111, additional ink cannot be supplied after liquid surface I of the supply communicating hole 423, so the full use of the ink becomes poor concave part 424 is provided, and it is configured such that second commu positioned lower than part 400bl that forms the bottom part of ink reservo distance tl As a result, as illustrated in Figure 15(d), in the state in whic has been completed, only a slight amount of ink remains in the vicinity of supply concave part 424 (part below second supply communicating hole 42 of ink that cannot be supplied can be markedly reduced Moreover, supply c formed on the bottommost part of ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14 reservoir chamber 111 flows into supply concave part 424 and accumulates part 424 when the amount of ink becomes small Therefore, by establishi part 424, it is possible to facilitate the full use of the ink inside ink reservoir
Debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave part 4 the difference of distance t2 is provided between second supply communic the bottom part side wall of supply concave part 424 (side wall on the lo 15(d)) As described above, when liquid surface I of the ink drops bel communicating hole 423, additional ink cannot be supplied, so the ink that supply communicating hole 423 and supply concave part 424 remains insi part 424 without being supplied to ink supply part 120 Dust or plastic deb inside frame part 110 when ink cartridge 14 is manufactured sometimes re but the specific gravity of this dust or plastic debris is greater than tha remains in the vicinity of the bottom part of frame part 110 Therefore, as il 15(d), debris E remains inside the ink remaining inside supply concave part E is supplied to ink supply part 120 and supplied to multifunction device there is a possibility that ink clogging will occur, making accurate pr communicating passage forming part 430, Figure 16(b) is a diagram that communicating passage forming part 430 from the perspective of arrow XV and Figure 16(c) is a diagram that shows ambient air communicating pas
430 from the perspective of arrow XVIc in Figure 16(a) As illustrated in Figure 16(a), ambient air communicating passage fo primarily equipped with first ambient air communicating chamber 431, whi roughly rectangular parallelepiped that communicates with ambient air second ambient air communicating chamber 432, which is formed into a r parallelepiped that communicates with ink reservoir chamber 111, and amb passage 433, which communicates with first ambient air communicating second ambient air communicating chamber 432 on the side of first surfa film 160 is welded (left front side of Figure 16, first surface 437a is a surfac in virtual plane R) The chambers and passage of first ambient air comm
431 and second ambient air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air c 433 are formed as film 160 is welded on the front side of Figure 16(a)
First ambient air communicating hole 434, which communicates with part 130, is formed on the side of second surface 437b that opposes first su ambient air communicating chamber 431 (second surface 437b is the surfac described above) In second ambient air communicating chamber 432, s communicating hole 435, which communicates with first chamber Ili chamber 111, is formed on the side of first surface 437a, and third ambient hole 436, which communicates with second chamber 111b of ink reservoi formed on second surface 437b (plate part 438) First ambient air communi formed on side wall surface 431a of first ambient air communicating chamb of ambient air intake part 130 (left back side in Figure 16), and communica is formed on side wall surface 432a of second ambient air communicating c these communicating openings 433a and 433b have opening areas tha smaller than the side wall areas of first ambient air communicating chamb ambient air communicating chamber 432 (side wall surfaces 431a an communicating openings 433a and 433b are formed) Because a part hav introduces ambient air with extremely small cross-sectional area (ambi passage 433) is provided (so-called labyrinth), the resistance of the flow air passes through becomes large As a result, it is possible to reduce the e ink than necessary through ambient air connection passage 433
As is clear from Figure 14(a), ambient air connection passage 433 slope direction of second ambient air communicating chamber 432 from communicating chamber 431 Because ambient air connection passage 433 the device is in the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1, ink that has penetrated into ambient air connection naturally returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 due to gravity More cross-sectional area of ambient air connection passage 433 is made small, ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 into ambient air connection p reduced Here, when ink penetrates into ambient air connection passage formed, and it is sometimes impossible to introduce ambient air normal described above, because ambient air connection passage 433 slopes dow penetrates into the passage, the ink is returned to ink reservoir chamber 111 of meniscuses can be substantially prevented Further, ambient air connecti formed as a result of the welding of film 160, so at least one of the surfaces can be deformed by bending In other words, ambient air connectio configured such that its cross-sectional area changes easily Therefore, e forms, the meniscus can be easily broken due to the bending and deformatio so ambient air can be introduced normally A portion of the surface of s air communicating hole 435 and second ambient air communicating hol ambient air can be reliably introduced into ink reservoir chamber 111 thro air communicating hole 436
Next, the mechanism that prevents the leakage of ink from ambient passage forming part 430 will be described with reference to Figures 16 described above, case 200 of ink cartridge 14 is formed into a cubic shape c largest surfaces that oppose one another, so when this is loaded onto a flat b assume one of two loading positions in which one of largest surfaces 210a a lower surface (bottom surface) At this time, ambient air intake part 130 is side surface of case 200, but, as described below, it is difficult for ink to lea communicating passage forming part 430 in either of the positions
Figures 16(b) and 16(c) show the positions of ambient air comm forming part 430 corresponding to each of the two loading positions Figur case in which ink cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connecti positioned on the lower side (the side of first chamber U 1 a of frame part 11 and first surface 437a is the lower side), and Figure 16(c) shows the cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positi side (the side of second chamber 111b of frame part 110 is the lower side a 437b is the lower side) As illustrated in Figure 16(b), when ink cartridge 14 is placed suc connection passage 433 is positioned on the lower side during the tra cartridge 14, the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 passes throug air communicating chamber 432 and ambient air communicating chamber into first ambient air communicating chamber 431 Moreover, as described connection passage 433 communicates through communicating opening markedly smaller area than the side surface of second ambient air comm prevented
As illustrated in Figure 16(c), when ink cartridge 14 is placed suc connection passage 433 is positioned on the upper side during the feeding o the ink stored inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows into second ambient chamber 432, but liquid surface I of the ink does not reach the op communicating opemng 433b of ambient air connection passage 433 As a r not flow into ambient air connection passage 433 from communicating op ink does not flow into first ambient air communicating chamber 431 The cartridge 14 is placed such that ambient air connection passage 433 is positi side, the efflux of ink from ambient air intake part 130 to the outside can be
As described above, by configuring first ambient air communicating ch ambient air communicating chamber 432, and ambient air connection described above and establishing the opening position of first ambient air co 434 and the opemng position of communicating opening 433b in symmetrical to ambient air connection passage 433, it is possible to prevent from ambient air intake part 130 Further, by making the cross-sectional a connection part 433 small, it is possible to reduce the evaporation of ink flow of ink into first ambient air communicating chamber 431
Here, link forming part 440 will be explained by returning to Figure 14 440 connects the vicinity of ambient air intake part 130 and ink dispensing reservoir chamber 111, and it is formed in roughly the center positio chamber 111 Therefore, link forming part 440 connects two locations that 110, so it is also a reinforcement member that maintains the strength of fra forming part 440 is also a divider plate that divides the chamber such th opening 112a and the side of second opening 112b are in roughly the sa (divider plate that divides first chamber I lia and second chamber 111 welded parts 413a, 413b, 414a, and 414b are respectively provided on th second openings 112a and 112b (front side and back side when viewe perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and the back si the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b), here, the direction p page is parallel to the Z-direction) from this ambient air side linking par upper end of the height direction (Y-direction) of ambient air side communicates with inner circumference welded part 412a of ambient passage forming part 430 Moreover, on dispensing side connecting circumference welded parts 416a, 416b, 417a, and 417b are respectively pr of first and second openings 112a and 112b (front side and back side w direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(a) and the front side and t viewed in the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 14(b), h perpendicular to the page is parallel to the Z-direction) from this dispensin 442 First linking communicating hole 443, which communicates between f and second chamber 111b, is formed on ambient air side linking part 441, a fourth linking communicating holes 444-446, which connect first chambe chamber 111b, are formed on dispensing side linking part 442 communicating holes 443-446 are not formed on linking forming part 440, and second chamber 111b do not communicate in the center region of ink 111, so slight differences sometimes arise in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 111b If there are differences in the amounts of ink in first second chamber 11 Ib, differences arise in the air pressure inside ink reser so the adverse effect that ink cannot be smoothly (or accurately) supplied a forming linking communicating holes 443-446 such they are spread across 440, it is possible to make the amounts of ink in first chamber Ilia and sec between first chamber I lia and second chamber 111b In other words, the ambient air into ink reservoir chamber 111 and the part that supplies ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside communicate in the absence of link for without the division of first chamber I lia and second chamber 111b introduction of ambient air and the supply of ink can be performed in a stab
Linking rib 418a, which connects multiple inner circumference welde provided on the side of first opening 112a from link forming part 440, an which connects inner circumference welded part 412b to 417b provided on opening 112b from link forming part 440, are formed on link forming part ribs 418a and 418b are not illustrated in the figure, but they are forme shapes with vertical walls that are lower than inner circumference welded p inner circumference welded parts 412b to 417b Further, most of these lin 418b are formed on the edge of link forming part 440 As a result, linking r connect inner circumference welded parts 412a to 417a and 412b to 4 formed on the edge of link forming part 440, so they can maintain the stren part 440 Moreover, linking ribs 418a and 418b are formed into thin- walle are formed with vertical walls that are lower than inner circumference welde and 412b-417b, so it becomes difficult to inhibit the flow of ink
Next, dispensing passage forming part 450 will be explained with refer Figure 17 is a diagram that shows dispensing passage forming part 450 diagram that shows the outline of dispensing passage forming part 450, an cross-sectional view of dispensing passage forming part 450 through lin Figure 17(a) In dispensing passage forming part 450, in the position dispensed, it is in the highest part inside ink reservoir chamber 111, and flows downward in the direction of ink supply part 120 and ambient air inta
As illustrated in the figure, dispensing passage forming part 450 is p partitions first dispensing communicating hole 452 with respect to ink rese and second dispensing communicating hole 454, which forms the opemng partition wall 453 The opened part of dispensing cylinder part 451 is open formed on the outside end surface of frame part 110, and the surface that op 451a is bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451 The regi dispensing partition wall 453 and film 160 is dispensing partition wall flow
Dispensing partition wall 453 forms the inner circumference welded 160 is welded, and dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and s communicating hole 454 are formed in the state in which film 160 is w welded end part of the other inner circumference welded parts 411b to 41 part of dispensing partition wall 453 is positioned on the same virtual plane part of outer circumference welded part 400b
A detailed description will be given below, but when ink is dispensed chamber 111, ink is dispensed in a state in which second dispensing comm is positioned on top and first dispensing communicating hole 452 is pos (position in which the Y-direction is the horizontal direction in Figure 17( sequentially passes through dispensing cylinder part 451, first dispensing co 452, dispensing partition wall flow path 453a and second dispensing comm and the ink is dispensed until liquid surface I of the ink reaches the state il 17(a) Dispensing partition wall 453 is formed roughly linearly fro communicating hole 452 to second dispensing communicating hole 454 dispensed smoothly without resistance
When ink is dispensed such that the mside of ink reservoir chamber 111 volume of ink expands and film 160 is damaged or deformed by the bo cartridge 14 is placed If film 160 is damaged, the ink leaks, and if film volume inside ink reservoir chamber 111 changes, making it impossible to order to reduce the amount of ambient air inside ink reservoir chamber 1 degree of deaeration of the ink and to reduce the generation of air bubbles deaeration of the ink is for the purpose of maintaining the viscosity of th constant level, and this is because, regarding the generation of air bubb when air bubbles are supplied to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), the to discharge the ink is not transmitted to the discharge opening (not illustr so the ink cannot be correctly discharged
In the case in which a subsequent decompression process is performed, air inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is aspirated from dispensing passage the resulting amount of ink is not correct, regardless of whether or not an a of ink was dispensed If the amount of ink is reduced, this causes losses cartridge 14, which is not preferable Therefore, when first dispensing co 452 is enclosed by roughly U-shaped dispensing partition wall 453 and communicating hole 454 is placed above (upper side in Figure 17(a)) liqu ink (or first dispensing communicating hole 452), there is an amount of liquid surface I of the ink and second dispensing communicating hole 454, of ink reservoir chamber 111 is decompressed, so it is possible to substa escape of the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 to the outside through d forming part 450 Here, the structure in the vicinity of detection part 140 will be describe
Figure 18 Figure 18 is a diagram that shows the vicinity of detection part 1 a diagram that shows the outline of the vicinity of detection part 140, cross-sectional view of detection part 140 through line XVIIIb-XVIIIb in Figure 18(c) is a cross-sectional diagram of the vicinity of detection part XVIIIC-XVIIIC in Figure 18(a)
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), detection part 140 projects outward fro both sides from bottom wall 141a, an inner side surface, which is formed 141c that is provided from bottom wall 141a and connects to both side ceiling surface, which is formed by ceiling wall 141d that connects to the side walls 141b and the top edge of inner side wall 141c and is positione wall 141a Detection part 140 is also equipped with arm supporting p provided such that it projects upward from the bottom surface formed by and supports sensor arm 470 from below, and vertical wall 143, which is inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part 400b) such arm supporting part 142 and extends in the direction of supply path fo provided in the vicinity of detection part 140 As is clear from Figure 18( part 142 is formed in the center of the width direction of the passage inside and it is arranged such that the end of sensor arm 470 (shielding arm positioned in the center of the passage inside detection part 140 The detail below, but sensor arm 470 rotates according to the amount of ink inside ink 111, and it is a member that is used to detect that ink cartridge 14 has accommodating chamber 50 of refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 (see the amount of remaining ink has become low by detecting the position of 473c with remaining ink detection sensor 57 (see Figure 5) provided on m 1 As described above, detection part 140 is translucent, and light from ligh can be transmitted to light receiving part 57b Therefore, when sensor arm part 473c) is positioned in the light path between light emitting part 57a a part 57b, it blocks the light to be received by light receiving part 57b, so it properties As a result, by rotating in accordance with the amount of ink i chamber 111 (reservoir space), sensor arm 470 can change the amount o light receiving part 57b and detect the presence or absence of remaining in the positions of light emitting part 57a and light receiving part 57b of remai than first gap t3 between the inside walls of enclosure 141 (pair of wa surfaces of both side walls 141b) and the outside of sensor arm 470 H inside detection part 140 is reduced, and when liquid surface I of the ink this reduction of ink and liquid surface I of the ink falls below detectio inside detection part 140 is depleted, but because first gap t3 between se enclosure 141 is minute, ink remains inside detection part 140 due to the the ink, and sensor arm 470 sometimes does not rotate normally due to this the ink Incidentally, the reason that first gap t3 is provided with minute sp this spacing is made wide, the spacing between light emitting part 57a and l 57b also widens, and the detection sensitivity of remaining ink detecti deteriorates Therefore, by forming arm supporting part 142 such that firs gap t4, it is ensured that the ink surface tension that is generated between a 142 and enclosure part 141 is greater than the ink surface tension that is sensor arm 470 and enclosure part 141 As a result, the ink that remains in 141 is drawn between arm supporting part 142 and enclosure part 141, s substantially prevent ink from remaining between sensor arm 470 and encl to suppress the inhibition of the behavior of sensor arm 470 Sensor behaves normally, so the amount of remaining ink can be accurately detecte
As illustrated in Figure 18(a), bottom wall 141a on the lower part of (lower side in Figure 18(a)) slopes downward in the direction of ink reservo the bottom surface formed by bottom wall 141a mside enclosure 141 also Therefore, ink that is drawn between enclosure part 141 and arm supporti downward in the direction of ink reservoir chamber 111 (or supply path Further, as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(b), the junct bottom wall 141a of enclosure 141 and arm supporting part 142 is forme cross-sectional perspective (roughly a right angle), so the capillary force o formed on sloping surface 143 a, which slopes downward in the directi forming part 420 from arm supporting part 141 Sloping surface 143a cons the inside wall of frame part 110 (outer circumference welded part illustrated in the cross-sectional view in Figure 18(c), the junction part o and the inside wall of frame part 110 is formed angularly from a cross-se (roughly a right angle), and it is formed such that its thickness is roughly e arm supporting part 141 Therefore, vertical wall 143 slopes downward supply path forming part 420, and the junction part with the inside wall o formed into a roughly right angle, so ink can be efficiently guided in the path forming part 420 by this slope and the capillary force In other words, t vertical wall 143 and the inside wall of frame part 110 forms a fluid guidi guiding the ink Because the thicknesses of arm supporting part 142 and ve formed such that they are roughly equivalent, vertical wall 143 is formed in arm supporting part 142 As a result, there is no resistance against the guidi path forming part 420, and ink can therefore by efficiently guided
In the case in which sensor arm 470 is rotated upward, sensor arm 470 the ceiling surface formed by ceiling wall 141b, which opposes bottom wal part 140, and the rotation of sensor arm 470 is thus restricted It is the prevent sensor arm 470 from jumping out of enclosure part 140, and the arm 470 becomes accurate, so it is possible to accurately detect the amount
Here, sensor arm 470 will be described with reference to Figure 19 Fig that shows sensor arm 470 Figure 19(a) is a diagram that shows the front 470, and Figure 19(b) is a diagram that shows sensor arm 470 from the pe XiXb in Figure 19(a) Sensor arm 470 is a member for detecting the amoun inside ink reservoir chamber 111 Sensor arm 470 is manufactured by inject a resm material (polypropylene, for example), and it has light-blocking prop which is attached to frame part 110 such that it can oscillate, and arm part 4 from this attachment part 472 in a direction that is roughly orthogonal to (upward in Figure 19(a)), further extends sloping upward, and blocks the detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 Attachment part 472 is connects balance part 471 and arm part 473
Roughly cylindrical attachment shaft 472a, which is attached to arm san (see Figure 14) of frame part 110, is formed on attachment part 472 Thi 472a is formed with a diameter that is smaller than the inside diameter o part 425 and is larger than the length of the opening of arm sandwiching pa when sensor arm 470 is rotated, it can be operated with little resistance, a sensor arm 470 from arm sandwiching part 425 can be prevented
Arm part 473 consists of vertical arm part 473 a, which extends in roughly perpendicular to balance part 471 (upward in Figure 19(a)), slopi which slopes upward from this vertical arm part 473a, and shielding arm p used as a light-blocking part that blocks the range of possible detection detection sensor 57
As illustrated in Figure 19(b), arm part 473 is formed such that it is su than balance part 471 and attachment part 472 This is because, when arm with a thick profile, the scale of detection part 140 is increased, and as a r 14 becomes large and the resistance when sensor arm 470 rotates increases, makes it impossible to detect the accurate amount of remaining ink Fur above, when the thickness of detection part 140 increases, the range of dete ink detection sensor 57 widens accordingly and the detection sensitivity expensive, high-performance remaining ink detection sensor with fa properties becomes necessary Therefore, arm part 473 is formed with a thm prevent increases in the scale of ink cartridge 14 and to detect the ac detection part 140 due to the surface tension of the ink and becoming unabl words, because arm protruding parts 473el and 473e2 are formed into se the only part that makes contact with the inside wall of detection part 140 protruding parts 473 el and 473 e2, so the effects of the surface tension of th Balance part 471 is made of a resin material with a specific gravity that of the ink, so when liquid surface I of the ink drops in step with decrease remaining ink, balance part 471 moves in the direction of the bottom part (direction of the bottom part of ink reservoir chamber 111, downward m 14(b)) in step with this drop in the liquid surface I of the ink When balance the direction of the bottom part, and arm part 473 moves in the direction o attachment part 472 as a rotational axis, shielding arm part 473 c deviates possible detection of remaining ink detection sensor 57 and thereby the st depleted can be detected
With a conventional balance part, the inside of the balance part was ho make the balance part float on liquid surface I of the ink, but with this working (or molding) of the balance part becomes difficult In contra embodiment, the materials of sensor arm 470 consist of materials with spe are less than that of the ink, so a working process is not required, and it i manufacture complex dies, so the manufacturing cost of sensor arm 470 can Next, the positional relationships and shapes of ink supply part 120, part 130, and detection part 140 will be described with reference to Figure diagram that shows a portion of ink reservoir element 100 Figure 20(a) shows the side surface of ink reservoir element 100, Figure 20(b) is a dia partial front view of ink reservoir element 100, and Figure 20(c) is a cr through line XXc-XXc in Figure 20(a)
As illustrated in Figures 20(a) and 20(b), ink supply part 120, ambient (top of Figure 20(a)) to bottom (bottom of Figure 20(a)) In other words aligned in the height direction (Y-direction) of ink cartridge 14
As illustrated in Figure 20(a), width t5 of detection part 140 is for shorter than diameter t6 of the opening of ink supply part 120 (opening 6 600 described below (see Figure 34)) Further, as illustrated in Figure 20 140 is formed such that it is concave in the direction of frame part 1 withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111) with respect to ink su ambient air intake part 130
As described above, arm part 473 of sensor arm 470 is positioned detection part 140 As will be described below, the light path of remai sensor 57 (see Figure 5) is opened from the light-blocking state due to the r 473, and the amount of remaining ink can be detected as a result On remai sensor 57, light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a are positione detection part 140 (both left and right sides in Figure 20(a)), so both side su part 140 (surfaces on the left and right sides in Figure 20(a), front and ba Figure 20(b)) form detection surfaces 140a and 140b As is clear from F detection surfaces 140a and 140b are parallel to the height direction ( cartridge 14 when m the position in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in other words, the surfaces are vertical When ink adheres to the front detection surfaces 140a and 140b, it is sometimes impossible to detect the a remaimng ink
For example, at the time of the transportation of multifunction d necessarily transported such that multifunction device 1 is horizontal The part 120 is sometimes positioned on top, but ink sometimes leaks out fro 120 at this time and adheres to detection pat 140 Moreover, when in temporarily removed from refill unit 13, ink that adheres to needle 49 of m ink detection sensor 57 are in close proximity in the installed state, as desc is a risk that the ink that has adhered to detection part 140 will transfer to l 57b and light emitting part 57a of remaining ink detection sensor 57 In adheres to remaining ink detection sensor 57 blocks light and therefor sensitivity of remaining ink detection sensor 57 This deterioration of sensit prominent in black cartridges that use pigmented ink
In this embodiment, as illustrated in Figure 20(b), detection part 14 position withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect 120, so it is possible to make it difficult for ink to adhere to detection pa drips from ink supply part 120 In other words, when the user maintains in position in which ink supply part 120 is higher than detection part 140 and ink supply part 120 (end surface on which opening 600a of supply cap vertical, ink that has adhered to the vicinity of the opening of ink suppl susceptible to the effects of gravity and likely to drop, but because det withdrawn to the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 with respect to ink su ink that drops does not head towards detection part 140, so it does not adher 140
Because detection surfaces 140a and 140b are vertical when in the pos cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13, the ink is most susceptible to the when ink cartridge 14 is installed in refill unit 13 while the ink is ad surfaces 140a and 140b, so it drops quickly It is therefore possible to subs transfer of ink to light receiving part 57b and light emitting part 57a detection sensor 57 Furthermore, the ink that drops does not adhere to the supply part 120 Further, as illustrated in Figure 20(c), side walls that form detection wa from the side surface of frame part 110 are formed on detection part 140 T Next, the configuration of the parts of ink reservoir element 100 will reference to Figure 21 Figure 21 is an exploded front view of ink reservoir
As illustrated in Figure 21, ink reservoir element 100 is primarily brok elements The four parts are frame part 110, ink supply mechanism 500, wh supply part 120, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which constitutes amb 130, and ink dispensing plug 520, which is pressed into dispensing cylind dispensing part 150 (see Figure 17) Ink dispensing plug 520 is made of such as Pulci rubber, and once it is pressed into dispensing cylinder part easily removed, and even if the needle is removed or inserted, it is config route of the needle is blocked
Ink supply element 116, which is formed in a roughly cylindrical s portion of ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted, and ambient air intake ele formed in a roughly cylindrical shape in which a portion of ambient air inta is inserted, are formed as a unit on frame part 110 Further, protruding pa (protruding part 116b is not illustrated in the figure), which protrude in t outer circumference of ink supply element 116 in order to fasten ink suppl are symmetrically arranged on ink supply element 116 centered on the a supply element 115 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions pe page in Figure 21) Likewise, protruding parts 117a and 117b (protrudin illustrated in the figure), which protrude in the direction of the outer circum air intake element 117 in order to fasten ambient intake mechanism 510, arranged on ambient air intake element 117 centered on the axial center of element 117 (arranged on the front and back sides in directions perpendic Figure 21) Protruding parts 116a, 116b, 117a, and 117b are formed such th on the side of ink reservoir chamber 111 protrudes in a direction that is pe outer circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 or the outer circumf Next, the components of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air
510 will be described with reference to Figures 22 through 33 Figure 22 is of ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air intake mechanism 510 exploded view of ink supply mechanism 500, and Figure 22(b) is an ambient air intake mechanism 510
As illustrated m Figure 22(a), ink supply mechanism 500 is equipped wi which is installed on ink supply element 116, supply joint 610, which is resin material such as rubber into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) of mult (see Figure 1) is inserted, supply valve 620, which blocks the flow path supply joint 610 and the bottom wall make contact, first supply spring 63 inside this supply valve 620 and is made of a resinous elastic material, which covers the open surface of supply valve 620 and can be operated in a which is the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pressed into n of arrow Ol in Figure 22(a), hereafter called the "axial direction Ol of ink 500", regarding this direction, as is clear from Figure 14, ink supply mech parallel to the X-direction when ink cartridge 14 is loaded), second supply is housed inside this supply slider 640 and is formed with the same material shape as those of first supply spring 630, valve seat 660, which makes second supply slider 650 and receives check valve 670, and cover 680, w valve 670 between the valve and this valve seat 660 Supply valve 620, first supply slider 640, and second supply spring 650 constitute supply valve m actually operates
As illustrated in Figure 22(b), ambient air intake mechanism 510 is equi air cap 700, which is installed on ambient air intake element 117, ambient a is made of an elastic resin material such as rubber, ambient air valve 720, flow path of ink when this ambient air joint 710 and the bottom wall make 22(b), hereafter called the "axial direction 02 of ambient air supply mec clear from Figure 14, ambient air supply 510 becomes parallel to the X- cartridge 14 is loaded), and second ambient air spring 750, which is ambient air slider 740 and is formed with the same material and into the sa of first ambient air spring 730 Ambient air valve 720, first ambient air s air slider 740, and second ambient air spring 750 constitute ambient air val that actually operates
Below, supply cap 600, supply joint 610, supply valve 620, first a springs 630 and 650, supply slider 640, valve seat 660, check valve 670, c air cap 700, ambient air joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first and second a 730 and 750, and ambient air slider 740 will be described with refere through 33
Figure 23 is a diagram that shows supply cap 600 Figure 23 (a) is a dia side view of supply cap 600, Figure 23 (b) is a diagram that shows a side v 600 from the perspective of arrow XXIIIb in Figure 23 (a), Figure 23 (c) shows a plan view of supply cap 600, Figure 23 (d) is a diagram that shows supply cap 600, and Figure 23 (e) is a cross-sectional view of supply cap XXIIIe-XXIIIe in Figure 23 (c)
As illustrated in Figure 23 (a), supply cap 600 is formed with a two-step view perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in the upper side part in Figure 23 (a) is supply securing part 601, which is fa circumferential surface of ink supply element 116 and is formed into a r shape, while the lower side part in Figure 23 (b) is ink storage part 602, storage space for preventing ink from dripping to the outside of ink cartridg Engagement holes 603a and 603b (see Figure 23(b) for engagement hol formed from the linking part of ink storage part 602 to the part in the moved approximately 90° with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply m are cut out facing the direction of ink storage part 602 from the top surface part 601 (upper end surface in Figure 23 (b)), are formed on supply securing
As illustrated in the front view in Figure 23 (c) and in the bottom vie insertion hole 605, into which needle 49 (see Figure 2) is inserted (de formed in roughly the center position of ink storage part 602 of supply cap in Figure 23 (c), the region from the circle that forms insertion hole 605 to outward is first upper wall 606a, which forms the upper end surface of in and the region from the circle of the outer side that forms first upper wall one step outward is sloping wall 606b, which forms a sloping surface that sl the direction of the bottom surface of ink storage part 602 The region fro outer side that forms this sloping wall 606b to the circle one step outward i which forms the lower end surface of ink storage part 602, and the region the outer side that forms lower wall 606c to the circle one step outward is 606d, which forms the lower end surface of supply securing part 601 and fo surface of ink storage part 602 The part that connects lower wall 606c and 606d is outer circumferential wall 606e, which forms the outer circumfere storage part 602 Sloping wall 606b forms the cylindrical part inside ink sto outer circumferential wall 606e, which is connected to this sloping wall 6 606c, forms the cylindrical part of the outside that encloses sloping wall 60 of the inside)
In Figure 23 (d), sloping wall 606b slopes downward, so the insertion op is formed into a tapered shape as illustrated in the cross-sectional view in that it decreases in diameter towards insertion hole 605 with a maximum opening 600a, which forms the final exit of the ink As a result, the inn surface on the side of axial center Ol of sloping wall 606b becomes the i f
64
so supply cap 600 is attached as it increases in diameter in the outer circum Because supply cap cutout parts 604a and 604b are formed, the diameter increases in the direction in which engagement parts 603a and 603b mo another Therefore, when supply cap 600 is to be attached, it can be attache strong pressure, so it is possible to improve the installation efficiency whil to supply cap 600
Figure 24 is a diagram that shows supply joint 610 Figure 24(a) is a di side view of supply joint 610, Figure 24(b) is a diagram that shows a plan v
610, Figure 24(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of supply joint 61 is a cross-sectional view of supply joint 610 through line XXIVd-XXIVd in
As illustrated m Figure 24(a), supply joint 610 is formed in three step perspective (perspective of the direction perpendicular to the page in Figu illustrated in the bottommost step (lower side m Figure 24(a)) is joint outer
611, which is the part that makes contact with second upper wall 606d of in of supply cap 600 (see Figure 23) and the inner circumferential surface part 601 and forms the outer circumference part of supply joint 610 circumference part 611 is the part that is sandwiched between second u supply cap 600 and the outside end surface of ink supply element 116 w which supply cap 600 is secured to ink supply element 116 The part illustr of joint outer circumference part 611 is joint inner circumference part 612 into and arranged inside ink supply element 116 (see Figure 21) and circumference part of supply joint 610, and the upper portion of joint inner 612 is illustrated in Figure 24(a) Further, the part illustrated at the top circumference part 612 is joint contact part 613, which makes contact with (see Figure 25) Supply joint 610 is made of an elastic material such as a res
As illustrated in Figure 24(b), the axial center of supply joint 610 is p Figure 24(d)), and this tip 613a makes contact with the bottom surface o and blocks the flow path of the ink Further, joint protruding part 614, wh the inner circumferential surface toward axial center 01, opening 612c, insertion opening of needle 49 (see Figure 2) formed on bottom surface 6 circumference part 612 (lower side in Figure 24(d)), and stepped insert which is formed between opening 612c and joint protruding part 614, ar inner circumference part 612 As illustrated in Figure 24(c), the portion o 612d that is formed in a stepped shape is formed with roughly equivalent center Ol in the outer circumferential direction Inner circumferential sur protruding part 614 is provided parallel to the direction of axial center mechanism 500, and stepped surface 614b is provided in a direction that is direction of axial center Ol
As illustrated in Figure 24(d), ink flow path 615, which passes thr surface 612b of joint inner circumference part 612 to tip 613 a of joint cont the upper side to the lower side in Figure 24(d)), is formed on supply joint path 615 consists of opening 612c, which is formed on bottom surface 61 path 615a, which is demarcated by stepped insertion passage 612d connecte protruding part flow path 615b, which is demarcated by inner circumferenti joint protruding part 614 connected to insertion passage 612d, and contact p which is demarcated by stepped surface 614b connected to inner circumfer of joint protruding part 614 and inner circumferential surface 613b of join connected to this stepped surface 614b
The lower half of step part flow path 615a is formed in a stepped shape axial center 01, and the upper half of step part flow path 615a is formed towards protruding part flow path 615b Moreover, step part flow path 61 stepped shape such that the diameter gradually decreases from opening needle 49 In this embodiment, supply cap 600 is equipped with ink stora portion of the lower half of step part flow path 615a that is formed in a s alternatively be formed in a tapered shape
Protruding part flow path 615b is the flow path with the smallest diamet 615, and it is formed into a roughly hollow cylindrical shape The insid protruding part flow path 615b is formed such that it is slightly smaller th needle 49 (see Figure 2) Contact part flow path 615c is formed into cylindrical shape having an inside diameter that is larger than that of protru 615b, and this inside diameter is sufficiently larger than the diameter of n stepped surface 614b is formed on the border of protruding part flow path part flow path 615c, the inside diameter in the direction of axial center O part flow path 615b to contact part flow path 615c drastically change illustrated in Figure 24(d), joint contact part 613 assumes a structure tha countersunk shape by its inner circumferential surface 613b and stepped sur 613a of joint contact part 613 is positioned in the periphery of this cutout pa
Needle 49, which is inserted from opening 612c, is guided to the upper flow path 615a that is formed in a tapered shape and is inserted into protrud 615b At this time, because the inside diameter of protruding part flow pa smaller than the diameter of needle 49, needle 49 elastically adheres to inn surface 614a of joint protruding part 614 that forms protruding part flow pressed inside such that it spreads protruding part flow path 615b In protruding part 614 acts to seal the periphery of needle 49 that is pressed i flow path 615b Moreover, if the area of the part of supply joint 610 that ela the periphery of needle 49 becomes large, the resistance when ink cartridg multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1) becomes large, and smooth installat impossible However, in this embodiment, a configuration that establishe Figure 25 is a diagram that shows supply valve 620 Figure 25(a) is a d a side view of supply valve 620, Figure 25(b) is a diagram that shows a si valve 620 from the perspective of arrow XXVb in Figure 25(a), Figure 25(c shows a plan view of supply valve 620, Figure 25(d) is a diagram that show supply valve 620, and Figure 25 (e) is a cross-sectional view of supply valv XXVe-XXVe in Figure 25(c)
As illustrated in Figure 25 (a), supply valve 620 is equipped with valve which forms the bottom surface of supply valve 620 (lower side surface in valve outer circumferential wall 622, which is provided along the direction of ink supply mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) from this valve bottom wall 6
A pair of valve guide grooves 623, into which slider loose insertion slider 640 (see Figure 27) is loosely inserted, is formed on valve outer ci 622 As illustrated in Figure 25 (c), the pair of valve guide grooves 623 formed with respect to axial center Ol of ink supply mechanism 500 More in Figure 25(c), valve projecting wall 624, which projects in the opposite bottom wall 621 from the top of valve outer circumferential wall 622 in the center 01, is formed on valve outer circumferential wall 622, and valve gui formed across the vicinity of the bottom of valve outer circumferential wal of this valve projecting wall 624 As a result, because the distance of valve is secured as a long distance, the deviation of slider loose insertion part 643 grooves 623 can be prevented
Moreover, a pair of valve constraining parts 625, which project in the op valve bottom wall 621 and restrict the operation of supply slider 640, is c outer circumferential wall 622 Each of the valve constraining parts 625 valve hook part 626, which projects towards axial center Ol from its tip (ti portion in Figure 25 (a)) and engages with supply slider 640 protruding parts 622a, the inner circumferential surface of ink supply ele outer circumferential surface 622 sometimes make contact, so the contac supply element 116 becomes large, and the resistance at the time of opera large Therefore, because valve protruding parts 622a formed in semic provided, only valve protruding parts 622a make contact with the inn surface of ink supply element 116, and the operations of supply valve 620 element 116 become smooth
Valve constraining parts 625 and valve projecting wall are formed suc upward from valve outer circumferential wall 622 As a result, the misali slider 640 in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial center Ol
Further, the operation of supply slider 640 in the direction of axial center valve constraining part 625, so first supply spring 630 can be reliably ho
As illustrated in Figure 25(c), four ink flow paths 627, which communi direction of valve bottom wall 621 (direction perpendicular to the page in formed on valve bottom wall 621 in positions corresponding to valve gui constraining part 625 in the direction of axial center Ol of ink suppl (direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 25(c)) Valve bottom wall 62 from its bottom surface and is equipped with valve bearing part 628, which receives spring top part 632 of first supply spring 630 (see Figure 26) Valv is made of two plate-shaped members arranged in parallel on valve bot illustrated in Figure 25 (e), the height of valve bearing part 628 in the direct Ol is formed such that it is substantially lower than valve outer circum Valve bearing part 628 is provided in order to ensure that first supply sp make contact with valve bottom wall 621 when first supply spring 630 space inside valve outer circumferential wall 622 This is because, if first makes contact with valve bottom wall 621, the ink flow path is blocked on the outside of valve bearing part 628 and on the inside of ink flow pa inner circumferential wall 629 is provided in order to restrict the movem spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center 01, and first su accurately bent in the direction of axial center Ol by restricting the move spring 630 in a direction that is orthogonal to axial center Ol
Figure 26 is a diagram that shows first supply spring 630 Figure 26(a shows a side view of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(b) is a diagram that of first supply spring 630, Figure 26(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom v spring 630, and Figure 26(d) is a cross-sectional view of first supply sprin XXVId-XXVId in Figure 26(b)
First supply spring 630 is formed in a roughly reversed bowl shape (or cone), and it is primarily equipped with ring-shaped spring bottom part 631 bottom surface of first supply spring 630 (end of the side with the ring-shaped spring top part 632, which is formed with a diameter that i diameter of this spring bottom part 631 and forms the top part of the up supply spring 630 (end of the side with the smaller diameter), and sprin which is connected between this spring top part 632 and spring bottom p and deforms when a load is applied in the direction of axial center mechanism 500 (the movement direction of supply valve 620 that is pres (see Figure 2), also the biased direction of first supply spring 630 and sec 650) Spring top part 632 makes contact with valve bearing part 628 of sup Figure 25) and forms a pressing part that presses supply valve 620 in the joint 610 (see Figure 24) The diameter of spring bottom part 631 is for larger than the diameter of spring top part 632, so spring bottom part 631 fo spring plastic part 633 is elastically deformed
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), ink flow path 634, which communicat Figure 26(d), the area of the opening of this ink flow path 634 gradually inc of spring top part 632 towards the bottom surface of spring bottom part illustrated in Figures 26(b) and 26(c), top part flow path 634a of spring top in a circular shape from the perspective of the direction perpendicular t spring plastic part 633 is curved and formed into a roughly reversed bowl s on the side moving away from axial center 01, spring plastic part 633 c deformed than in the case in which spring plastic part 633 is a roughly conic
The cross-sectional shape of top part flow path 634a of spring top par formed into a roughly quadrilateral shape When the opening of top flow p into a roughly quadrilateral shape, the effects of air bubbles contained reduced Here, the air bubbles contained in the ink are spherical, so whe blocked by air bubbles that grow larger than the inside diameter of top pa the ink flow path (passage) is eliminated, and it is not possible to send in device 1 (see Figure 1) normally As a result, the quality of printing by mult decreases However, when the opening of top part flow path 634a quadrilateral shape, the four corners are not blocked even if air bubbles tha the opening surface of top part flow path 634a accumulate, so it is p decreases in printing quality by preventing the ink flow path from being bl opening surface of top part flow path 634a is not limited to a quadril alternatively be formed into a polygon such as a hexahedron or a star embodiment, even if it is circular, it may be formed with a diameter with w air bubbles would be minimal
As illustrated in Figure 26(d), spring top part 632 is formed into cylindrical shape that extends in the direction of axial center 01, and it is fo cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the direction of axial center Ol (b first supply spring 630) is uniform Similarly, spring bottom part 631 is a axial center Ol become weak in comparison to spring bottom part 631 and Furthermore, spring plastic part 633 is formed such that it has a thinner bottom part 631 and spring top part 632, so this also reduces the strength first supply spring 630 elastically deforms, spring plastic 633 plastically def Second supply spring 650 is formed with the same shape as that of first and the composition of second supply spring 650 consists of spring botto top part 652, spring plastic part 653, and ink flow path 654 (top part flow part flow path 654b, and bottom part flow path 654c) Further, first ambient second supply spring 750 are also formed with the same shape as that of 630, and they respectively consist of spπng bottom parts 731 and 751, sp and 752, spring plastic parts 733 and 753, ink flow paths 734 and 754 (t 734a and 754a, plastic part flow paths 734b and 754b, and bottom part fl 754c)
Figure 27 is a diagram that shows supply slider 640 Figure 27(a) is a d a side view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(b) is a diagram that shows a si slider 640 from the perspective of arrow XXVIIb in Figure 27(a), Figure that shows a plan view of supply slider 640, Figure 27(d) is a diagram th view of supply slider 640, and Figure 27(e) is a cross-sectional view of through line XXVIIe-XXVIIe in Figure 27(c) Supply slider 640 is formed from a resin material with a higher degre first supply spπng 630 (see Figure 26) and second supply spring 650, a equipped with slider outer circumferential wall 641, which forms the supply slider 640, a pair of slider projecting walls 642a and 642b, which slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction of axial center mechanism 500, a pair of slider loose insertion parts 643, which extend circumferential wall 641 to the upper tip of slider projecting wall 642a ( 27(c), slider projecting walls 642a and 642b are positioned [symmetrical sandwich axial center 01, and the pair of slider loose insertion parts 643 [symmetrically] such that they sandwich axial center Ol
The inside diameter of slider outer circumferential wall 641 is form roughly equivalent to the outside diameter spring lower parts 631 and 651 supply springs 630 and 650, and slider projecting walls 642a and /642b ar they project from this slider outer circumferential wall 641 in the direction so when first and second supply springs 630 and 650 are arranged, the mo second springs 630 and 650 in the direction orthogonal to axial center Ol result, first and second springs 630 and 650 are elastically deformed in the center Ol
Slider loose insertion parts 643 are formed such that they extend in the center Ol of supply slider 640 (formed across slider outer circumferential protruding part 642), so when they are loosely inserted into valve guide Figure 25), they are moved smoothly in the direction of axial center Ol of and misalignment in the direction orthogonal to the direction of axial prevented
Figure 28 is a diagram that shows valve seat 660 Figure 28(a) is a dia side view of valve seat 660, Figure 28(b) is a diagram that shows a plan 660, Figure 28(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of valve seat 660, a cross-sectional view of valve seat 660 through line XXVIIId-XXVIIId in
As illustrated in Figure 28(a), valve seat 660 is equipped with valve sea which forms the bottom surface of this valve seat 660 and makes contact w 632 of second supply spring 650, and valve seat bearing parts 662, which top surface of this valve seat bottom part 661 (upper side in Figure 28 (a) bearing part 662 is equipped with valve seat sloping surface 662a, which sl than valve seat sloping surface 662a of valve seat bearing part 662 (ho valve seat bearing part 662) Therefore, because first valve seat throu formed on a portion that differs from the portion that receives check valve of the ink flow path can be prevented Moreover, second valve seat through-holes 663, which pass through part 661, are formed between valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve seat second valve seat through-holes 663 are formed with left-right symmetry b line (center lme Q illustrated in Figure 28) that passes through axial cente mechanism 500 (see Figure 22) in Figure 28(b) This second valve seat form an ink flow path through which ink flows
As illustrated in Figure 28(c), concave valve seat communicating gr connect each of the second valve seat through-holes 663, are formed on the valve seat bottom part 661 These valve seat communicating grooves 66 valve seat through-holes 663 to one another in a roughly linear manner on of valve seat bottom part 661 Therefore, three valve seat communicating g intersect at axial center 01, are formed Moreover, a pair of valve projectin project from this bottom surface, is formed on the bottom surface of valv 661 Spring top part 652 of second supply spring is housed in each o projecting parts 665, and they make contact with the outer circumferential top part 652 of second spring 650, so the movement of second supply direction orthogonal to axial center Ol is restricted
As illustrated in Figure 28(d), a gap is formed between valve seat slopi valve seat bearing parts 662 and second valve seat through-holes 663 in the center Ol As a result, even if check valve 670 is supported on valve seat sl the flow path of the ink is secured Moreover, even if the end surface of spri second supply spring 650 makes contact with the bottom surfaces of r '
74
Figure 29 is a figure that shows check valve 670 Figure 29(a) is a dia side view of check valve 670, Figure 29(b) is a diagram that shows a plan v 670, Figure 29(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom view of check valve 67 is a cross-sectional view of check valve 670 through line XXIXd-XXIXd in 5 Check valve 670 is roughly formed into an umbrella shape from a sid
(perspective in the direction perpendicular to the page in Figure 29(a)), umbrella part 671 and shaft part 672 Umbrella part 671 blocks the flow making contact with cover 680 (see Figure 30), and, as illustrated m Figur it is equipped with linking part 671, which is connected to shaft part 672, a 0 which extends roughly uniformly in the outer circumferential direction fro 671a and is formed with a thin profile As a result, when it makes conta wing part 671b, which is formed with a thin profile, adheres to cover 680 deformed, so it is possible to reliably block the ink flow path communicat 680 and check valve 670 5 As illustrated in Figure 29(a), the bottom surface of umbrella part 6 curved shape and is supported by valve seat bearing parts 662 of valve se 28), so the flow path of the ink is opened in the state in which umbrella pa by valve seat bearings 662 of valve seat 660, while the flow path of the in state in which umbrella part 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cov 0 Shaft part 672 is a part that is inserted into second cover through-hole 6 of cover 680, which will be described below This shaft part 672 is positio of cover 680 in the state in which it is attached to cover 680, and it has bal is formed into a roughly spherical shape This ball part 672a is formed wit greater than that of second cover through-hole 684 of cover 680, and it pr 5 670 from falling off once it is attached to cover 680 As a result, it is pos loss of check valve 670 when manufacturing ink cartridge 14, and operation circumferential wall 681, which forms the outer periphery, and cover to forms the top surface of cover 680 (upper side in Figure 30(a)), and it is fo bottom surface side is opened Valve seat 660 is fitted into the opening of of cover 680 (lower side in Figure 30(a)), and check valve 670 is housed 660 and cover 680 In other words, the space that houses check valve 670 i 680 and valve seat 660 '
As illustrated in Figures 30(b) and 30(c), six first cover through-hole through the front and back of cover 680, are formed in the circumferen respect to axial center Ol These first cover through-holes 683 form a which ink flows, and when umbrella part 671 of check valve 670 (see contact with cover top part 682, first cover through-holes 683 are blocked path is thus also blocked
Moreover, second cover through-hole 684, into which shaft part 672 of inserted, is formed in the center of cover top part 682 (position passing th Ol of ink supply mechanism 500) Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is second cover through-hole 684, and check valve 670 is thereby attached which check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through-hole 684, th ink is formed on a portion of this inner circumferential surface However, 671 of check valve 670 makes contact with cover top part 682, the through-hole is blocked, so the ink flow path of second cover through-hole center is simultaneously blocked
Figure 31 is a diagram that shows ambient air cap 700 Figure 31 (a) shows a side view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 31(b) is a diagram that sh ambient air cap 700 from the perspective of arrow XXXIb in Figure 31 (a) diagram that shows a plan view of ambient air cap 700, Figure 31 (d) is a dia bottom view of ambient air cap 700, and Figure 31(e) is a cross-sectional v ambient air securing part 701 (lower side in Figure 31 (a)) to the vicini (vicinity of the end of the upper side in Figure 31 (a)) and are engaged wit 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 described above when am fastened to ambient air intake element 117, are formed on ambient air securi As illustrated in Figure 3 l(b), ambient air cap cutout parts 704a and 704 cutout part 704b is not illustrated in the figure), which are formed in approximately 90° with respect to axial center 02 from the positions in holes 703a and 703b are formed and are cut out from the top end of ambie 701 to the vicinity of the bottom part, are formed on ambient air securing pa Moreover, as illustrated in the plan view in Figure 3 l(c) and in the bott
31(d), ambient air cap insertion hole 705, into which joint skirt part 714 ambient air joint 710, which will be described below, and valve open par 33) of ambient air valve 720 are inserted, is formed in a roughly central p air cap bottom wall 702 Ambient air joint 710 (see Figure 32) is housed contact with the inside surface of ambient air cap bottom wall 70 circumferential surface of ambient air securing part 701
When ambient air cap 700 is attached to ambient air intake element 11 117a and 117b of ambient air intake element 117 protrude in the out direction, as with supply cap 600, so ambient air cap 700 is attached diameter in the outer circumferential direction Therefore, when ambient a attached, it can be attached without applying strong pressure, so it is possi installation efficiency while reducing damage to ambient air cap 700
Figure 32 is a diagram that shows ambient air joint 710 Figure 32(a) shows a side view of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(b) is a diagram that of ambient air joint 710, Figure 32(c) is a diagram that shows a bottom vi joint 710, and Figure 32(d) is a cross-sectional view of ambient air joint f
11
air cap bottom wall 702 and forms the outer circumference part of ambient part illustrated at the top step of this joint outer circumference part circumference part 712, which is provided on the inside of ambient air i (see Figure 21) and forms the inner circumference part of ambient air joi part of joint inner circumference part 712 is illustrated in Figure 32(a) illustrated at the top step of joint inner circumference part 712 is conta makes contact with ambient air valve 720 The part illustrated at the botto skirt part 714 formed with a thin profile, which is a member that covers the valve open part 721a (see Figure 33) of ambient air valve 720 and expos from ambient air cap 700
As illustrated in Figure 32(b), the axial center of joint outer circumfere inner circumference part 712, joint contact part 713, and joint skirt part 71 the same axial center as in the direction of axial center 02 of ambient air 510 Moreover, ambient air joint 710 is made of an elastic material such as when ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), j which is formed with a thin profile, makes contact with the end surfac device 1 and is elastically deformed
As illustrated in Figure 32(d), joint contact part 713 projects from to joint inner circumference part 712 (surface on the side that makes contac valve 720) Joint contact part 713 is formed such that it narrows toward ti part in Figure 32(d)), and this tip 713a makes contact with the bottom surf valve 720 and blocks the ambient air intake path Moreover, as illustrate joint passage 715, which passes from the bottom surface of joint inner circu to tip 713a of joint contact part 713 (upper side to lower side in Figure 32 ambient air joint 710, and valve open part 721a of ambient air valve 720 i joint passage 715 i wall 721, valve outer circumferential wall 722, valve protruding part groove 723, valve projecting wall 724, valve constraining part 725, val ambient air intake path 727 (part corresponding to ink flow path 627), valv and valve inner circumferential wall 729 will be omitted here Illustrations be visually confirmed in the side view (Figure 33 (a)) and bottom view ambient air valve 720 will also be omitted here '
Ambient air valve 720 is equipped with valve open part 721a, which bottom surface of valve bottom wall 721 Valve open part 721a is position 02 of ambient air intake mechanism 510 and is roughly formed into a ro semicircular convex part 721b, which projects from the bottom part (lo Figure 22) to valve bottom wall 721 in the outer circumferential direction outer circumferential surface of valve open part 721a This valve open par joint passage 715 (see Figure 32) of ambient air joint 710 described above, is exposed to the outside of ambient air cap 700 (see Figure 31) When i installed in multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), valve open part 721a the end surface of multifunction device 1, and the contact with joint co 713a) of ambient air joint 710 is broken, thus forming an ambient air intake
When ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifunction device 1 and val operates, joint skirt part 714 of ambient air joint 710 also makes contact wi of multifunction device 1 and elastically deforms, and this blocks communi ambient air intake path and the outside of joint skirt part 714 As a result, introduced from the side of multifunction device 1 can be introduced sm even if joint skirt part 714 elastically deforms toward axial center 02 and valve open part 721a, the ambient air intake path can be secured by convex open part 721a It is therefore possible to prevent the ambient air intake blocked and ensure that ambient air is introduced into ink reservoir chamb As illustrated in Figure 34, ink supply mechanism 500 is inserted in inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 116, and a mechanism 510 is inserted into and attached to inner circumferential surfa air intake element 117 First, ink supply mechanism 500, which is attached to ink supply ele described On inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 11 801, which projects in the direction of the inside of inner circumferential on the side of first supply communicating hole 421 of supply path forming projecting wall 801 is formed into a stepped shape that can house cover inserted such that it makes contact with stepped surface 801a of this pr which is formed into a stepped shape, and the position on the sid communicating hole 421 of ink supply mechanism 500 is thus determined
Shaft part 672 of check valve 670 is inserted into second cover through 680, and valve seat 660 is arranged such that it houses this check valve 67 Second supply spring 650 is arranged on the bottom surface side of this v side in Figure 34), and supply slider 640 is arranged such that it houses t spring 650 First supply spring 630 is housed by supply slider 640 on th second supply spring 650, and first supply spring 630 is arranged between and supply valve 620 Moreover, supply joint 610 is arranged such that it the bottom surface of supply valve 620, and supply cap 600 is fastened to supply element 116 such that it makes contact with the bottom surface of th Supply cap 600 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 116a and 1 element 116, so the position on the outside of ink supply mechanism 5 Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center Ol of ink supply determined by supply cap 600 and stepped surface 801a of inner circumfer of ink supply element 116 small Therefore, even if supply valve 620 operates in a diagonal directi axial center Ol and makes contact with inner circumferential surface 80 prevent the state in which supply valve 620 cannot be operated Moreove between supply valve 620 and inner circumferential surface 800, so an i passes through the inside of ink supply mechanism 500 and an ink flo through the outside of supply valve 620 are formed As a result, inner circ 800 of ink supply element 116 is the space that forms the ink flow path cha
As described above, slider platform part 644 is in a state in which it spring bottom part 631 of first supply spring 630 and spring bottom part spring member 650 On the contact side of spring platform part 644 with 631 of second supply spring 650, it is engaged by two valve hook parts 6 620, and movement in the direction of axial center Ol is thus restπcted between supply valve 620 and supply slider 640 is shorter than the len spring 630 in the direction of axial center 01, so first supply spring 630 is deformed in the position in which it is attached to ink supply element 116
Next, ambient air intake mechanism 510, which is attached to ambient 117, will be described On inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air i protruding part 811, which protrudes in the direction of ambient air intak (left direction in Figure 34), is formed on the end surface of ambient forming part 430 on the side of first ambient air communicating chamber T 811 is configured as a pair of plate-shaped member, and it makes contact w of spring top part 752 of second ambient air spring 750 As a result, an ambi is formed between protruding part 811 and spring top part 752 of second 750 Moreover, the position of ambient air intake mechanism 510 on the si air communicating hole 434 is determined as a result of second ambie making contact with protruding part 811 outside of ambient air intake element 17 such that it makes contact with the the outer circumferential side from joint skirt part 714 of this ambient air j air cap 700 is fastened as it engages with protruding parts 117a and 117b of element 117, so the position on the outside of ambient air intake determined Therefore, the position of the direction of axial center 02 of mechanism 510 is determined by ambient air cap 700 and protruding circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake element 117
Moreover, the space formed between ambient air valve 720 and ambie shorter than the length of first ambient air spring 730 in the direction of axi with ink supply mechanism 500, first ambient air spring 730 is already plast the position in which it is attached to ambient air intake element 117
Next, the manufacturing process of ink cartridge 14 will be described Figures 35 through 39 Figure 35 is a diagram that explains the manufactur film 160 is welded Figure 36 is a diagram that explains the welding pr Figure 36(a) is a diagram that explains the welding surface of frame part 11 160 is welded, and Figure 36(b) is a diagram that explains the welding pro 160 is welded to frame part 110 Figure 37 is a diagram that explains process performed after film 160 is welded Figure 37(a) is a diagram attachment process in which ink supply mechanism 500 and ambient air 510 are attached to frame part 110, Figure 37(b) is a diagram that explains process, and Figure 37(c) is a diagram that explains the ink dispensing proc diagram that explains the installation process of case 200 Figure 38(a) explains the process in which case 200 sandwiches frame part 110, and diagram that explains the welding process in which case 200 is welde diagram that explains the manufacturing process performed before ink cartri Figure 39(a) is a diagram that explains the process in which protector 30 is mjection-molded and m a second molding process (preparatory proces arm 470 is mjection-molded
In sensor arm 470, attachment shaft 472a, which is provided on attac sensor arm 470 is attached to arm sandwiching part 425, which is provide supply path forming part 420 of frame part 110 (sensor arm 470 a preparatory process) Arm sandwiching part 425 opens on the opposite sid supply element 116 (top of Figure 35) In other words, the opening of ar 425 opens on the side of second reservoir chamber opening 114 As a resu can be attached in the range in which first chamber Ilia and seco communicate, so sensor arm 470 can be efficiently attached with little inter shielding arm part 473c of arm part 473 is attached such that it is house detection part 140 (inside enclosure part 141) When sensor arm 470 i sandwiching part 425, the vertical and horizontal range of movement of 473c is restricted by each wall 141a to 141d of enclosure part 141 of det other words, once the attachment of sensor arm 470 is complete, sensor a easily detached, so it is possible to prevent the manufacturing process of ink becoming complicated and to prevent sensor arm 470 from detaching from when the ink cartridge is transported As a result, when ink cartridge multifunction device 1, the empty ink state can be reliably detected, so th product can be improved
In this embodiment, a supporting part that forms the axis of rotational o arm 470 is configured as attachment part 472 (attachment shaft 472a) of supported on arm sandwiching part 425 of frame part 110, but a configur attachment shaft is provided on the side of frame part 110 and a sandwichi on the side of sensor arm 470 may also be used, and a configuration in whi and frame part 110 are attached using a hinge junction would also be ac outside surface of frame part 110, and it is not pressed to a position such th with bottom part 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451 This is because, a first dispensing communicating hole 452 of dispensing passage forming par the side surface of dispensing cylinder part 451, and when ink dispensing p to the back of dispensing cylinder part 451 , first dispensing communicatmg block, making it impossible to dispense ink Moreover, ink dispensing attached before sensor arm 470 is attached
As illustrated in Figure 36(a), when the attachment of sensor arm 470 plug 520 is complete, film 160 is then welded (film 160 securing process) to frame part 110 such that it covers both the openings of first opening opening 112b In other words, film 160 is welded to both sides of fram securing processes - a first securing process in which film 160 is welded to (preparatory process), and a second securing process in which film 160 is opening 112b As illustrated in Figure 36(b), film 160 is cut such that it is larger than t of frame part 110 and it covers frame part 110 At this time, film 160 is opening 112a and second opening 112b without wrinkles by aspirating aspirator (not illustrated in the figure) from the side of frame part 110 surface 900 of an ultrasonic welding device (not illustrated in the figure) is 160 such that it covers the outer circumference parts of first and second o 112b (outer circumference welded parts 400a and 400b) from the top of 160 is welded to frame part 110 When film 160 is welded to each wel painted black in Figure 37(a) (outer circumference welded parts 400a an circumference welded parts 411a to 417a and 411b to 417b) are welded On frame part 110, multiple inner circumference welded parts 411a to
417b are dispersed on the inner circumferential side of outer circumference Moreover, film 160 is made of a double-layered film comprising a polyethylene film (called "nylon polyethylene" hereafter), and the side t with frame part 110 is the polyethylene film layer This nylon polyethylene liquids, but it is relatively gas permeable, so a small amount of gas circ between ink reservoir chamber 111, which is roughly sealed by film 160, 930 (see Figure 39(b)), which will be described below As a result, gas th ink mside ink reservoir chamber 111 can gradually pass through film 160 space formed between enclosure element 930 and case 200, so the genera inside the ink can be prevented Accordingly, the occurrence decreases in p to air bubbles inside the ink can be prevented Moreover, as long as it can and is relatively gas permeable, film 160 may be made of any type of subst a film in which a nylon film and a polypropylene film are formed into t formed by mixing nylon and polyethylene or nylon and polypropylene coul
Frame part 110 is formed from a polyethylene resin, and it is made o substance as the film of film 160 on the side of frame part 110 Because f part 110 are formed from the same material, both film 160 and the welded and welded reliably at the time of ultrasonic welding In this embodime double-layer structure Nylon films are superior to polyethylene films from strength, but their melting point is high, so they are deficient from the pers operationality Therefore, when film 160 is formed with a double-layer nylon and polyethylene, the strength is secured, and by using the polyeth layer that is welded to frame part 110, welding can be performed at a low he so welding operationality is secured Furthermore, the nylon layer doe welding operation, so there are fewer changes in the thickness of the film in welded parts, and the strength of the film in the vicinity of the welded maintained component in which cover 680, check valve 670, and valve seat 660 are f inserted inside ink supply element 116 (position that makes contact wit 801a) At this time, the tip of check valve 670 is inserted into first supply co 421 (see Figure 34), and it is attached such that it projects into the space e partition wall 422 A component in which supply joint 610, supply valv spring 630, supply slider 640, and second supply spring 650 are formed as a cap 600 is inserted inside inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply supply cap 600 is secured to the outer circumferential surface of ink suppl this time, supply cap 600 is pushed in the direction of ink supply engagement holes 603a and 603b of supply cap 600 are engaged with pro and 116b of ink supply element 116 In supply joint 610, joint inner circum pressed inside inner circumferential surface 800 of ink supply element 11 circumference part 611 is sandwiched between ink supply element 116 an When the attachment of supply cap 600 to ink supply element 116 is compl of ink supply mechanism 500 is complete, and ink supply part 120 is constr
As with the attachment of ink supply mechanism 500 to ink supply attachment of ambient air intake mechanism 510 to ambient air int (attachment process) is performed in a process in which a component in joint 710, ambient air valve 720, first ambient air spring 730, ambient a second ambient air spring 750 are formed as a umt in ambient air cap 700 inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake element 117, and a is fixed to the outer circumferential surface of ambient air intake element ambient air cap 700 is pushed to the side of ambient air intake element 117 holes 703a and 703b of ambient air cap 700 are engaged with protruding pa of ambient air intake element 117 In ambient air joint 710, joint inner circu is pressed inside inner circumferential surface 810 of ambient air intake (each attachment process) is complete, a decompression process in which t part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 111) is decompressed is performed In thi decompression of the inside of frame part 110 is performed from the side 120 In the decompression of the inside of frame part 110, suction tub reducing device 910 is first inserted into supply joint 610 of ink supply supply valve 620 is pressed by suction tube 911, thus opemng fhe ink f pump (Pl) 912 is then activated and the ambient air inside frame part 11 ambient air inside frame part 110 is aspirated by pressure reducing device reaches a prescribed pressure (pressure that is at least lower than the suction pump 912 is stopped, and suction tube 911 is removed from ink When suction tube 911 is removed from ink supply part 120, supply valve with joint contact part 613 of supply joint 610 due to the elastic force o supply spπngs 630 and 650, and the flow path of the ink is thus blocked, so state is maintained As illustrated in Figure 37(c), when the decompression inside frame pa after the decompression process, ink dispensing needle 920 is inserted i plug 520, and ink is dispensed into frame part 110 (ink reservoir chamber 11 process) The inside of ink reservoir chamber 111 is depressurized, so dispensed into ink reservoir chamber 111, and when a prescπbed amoun dispensed, dispensing needle 920 is removed and the ink dispensing pro The air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 after ink is dispensed is ai pressure) Moreover, "a prescribed amount of ink" refers to the quantity surface I of the ink drops below second ambient air communicating h ambient air communicating hole 436 of ambient air communicating passage as illustrated in Figure 37(c) Therefore, when ink is dispensed, the penet ambient air connection passage 433 can be avoided The purpose for not dis shape and size depending on the state in which ink cartridge 14 is placed remaining ink
Ink is dispensed in the state in which the inside of ink reservoi decompressed by pressure reducing device 910, so even after the dis complete, the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111 is in the deco pressure pi) Therefore, there are cases in which a subsequent decompres required after the ink dispensing process If a subsequent decompression performed, the manufacturing process could be simplified However, th mside ink reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed is not ne prescribed range, so in this embodiment, a subsequent decompression proc order to adjust the air pressure to a level within the prescribed range (in or the air pressure is within the prescribed range)
Here, although it is not illustrated in the figures, the subsequent deco that is performed after the ink is dispensed will be described The subsequ process is performed using ink dispensing needle 920, which was inserted i plug 520 In other words, a supply device that supplies ink (not illustrated i pressure reducing device that reduces the pressure by aspirating the ambie part 110 (not illustrated in the figure) are connected to ink dispensing nee the ink is completely dispensed, the flow path is switched and decompressi reducing device is begun The air pressure p3 (third pressure) inside ink 111 after subsequent decompression is performed is lower than the air pres reservoir chamber 111 after the ink is dispensed Therefore, the quantity reservoir chamber 111 further decreases as a result of the subsequent deco so the generation of air bubbles mside the ink can be prevented, and th printing quality due to air bubbles can be avoided Moreover, the ink that fl of the ink dispensing process collides with the inside surface inside ink rese dispensing communicating hole 454 is positioned above liquid surface I Figure 17(a)), so even if subsequent decompression is performed with a device, the ink is never aspirated to the outside through the dispensing p amount of ink that is dispensed never changes due to subsequent deco possible to reliably dispense a prescribed amount of ink
Although it is not illustrated in the figures, when the dispensing (or dec ink is complete, in dispensmg plug 520 is pressed until it makes contact 451b of dispensing cylinder part 451 (end surface on the side of ink reser Therefore, after ink dispensing plug 520 is pressed to bottom part 451b of d part 451, first dispensing communicating hole 452 is blocked by the out surface of ink dispensing plug 520, so even if the dispensing needle is once again, the ink is not dispensed In other words, m the manufacturi cartridge 14, it is possible to prevent the dispensing process from being pe to prevent the occurrence of defective products As illustrated m Figure 38(a), when the dispensing (or decompressi complete, the manufacture of ink reservoir element 110 is complete, so th assembled (case 200 assembly process) Case 200 (first and second case 220) is molded by injection-molding, and it is manufactured in advan process) As described above, in the assembly of cover 200, rod members 215a to member 210 are inserted into three through-holes 460a to 460c (se through-holes 460b and 460c), which are formed on the outer circumfere part 100, and ink reservoir element 110 is thus installed in first case member ink supply part 120 (supply cap 600) and ambient air intake part 130 (ambie respectively engaged with case cutout parts 211 and 212, and the outer wall 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of 120 (outer circumferential surface of supply cap 600) and the outer wall of element 130 (outer circumference of ambient air cap 700) make contact wi 221a and 222a
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), when the assembly of first and second (assembly process) is complete, first and second case members 210 and 220 another (case 200 welding process) In the welding process of first and sec 210 and 220, first case welded part 216 of first case member 210 and firs 226 of second case member 220 are welded together, and second case weld case member 210 and second case welded part 227 of second case memb together (the portions indicated by the diagonal lines in Figure 38(b) ar embodiment, the entire first and second welded parts 226 and 227 are weld welding process, but several spots may be partially welded instead In othe the parts are welded such that case 200 does not peel during transportation peel due to human actions, any welding range or welding method may be us In this embodiment, first and second case members 210 and 220 are a ink is dispensed into ink reservoir element 100, and first and second case 220 are then welded, so the vibration due to ultrasonic welding is abs Therefore, it is possible to reduce situations in which the welded parts of film 160 are damaged or film 160 peels as a result of vibration accompany case 200 Moreover, when the welded parts of first and second case membe partially welded, the generation of vibration due to ultrasonic welding i damage of each part or the peeling of film 160 can be further reduced
As illustrated in Figure 38(b), case projecting parts 214a and 224a (c 214a is not illustrated in the figure) and case projecting parts 214b and 224 part 214b is not illustrated in the figure) project outward from ink sup ambient air intake part 130 Therefore, when ink cartridge 14 is to be when ink cartridge 14 is attached to multifunction device 1 (see Figure 1), such that it can be freely attached and detached As described above, prot and 330bl of protector 300 engage with through-holes formed by case proj 214a and 224a (see Figure 8) of first and second case members 2 through-holes formed by case projecting cutout parts 214b and 224b of fir members 210 and 220, and protector 300 is thus attached to case 200 protector fitting parts 330a and 330b of protector 300 elastically deform i away from one another, protector 300 can be easily attached and detached
As illustrated in Figure 39(b), when the attachment of protector 300 (at is complete, ink cartridge 14 is housed mside packaging bag 930 in order to 14 (housing process) The inside of packaging bag 930 is then decompr reducing device 940 (packaging bag 930 packaging space decompression p bag 930 is a bag element with one open end (end of the right front side of in the packaging process, all of the other opened portions excluding ultrasonically welded in a state in which ink cartridge 14 is enclosed S pressure reducing device 940 is inserted through this opening 931 , and the of packaging bag 930 is aspirated and reduced by activating suction pump pressure of packaging bag 930 due to this decompression is at a level lowe pressure, but it is reduced such that it becomes air pressure p2 (second p lower than air pressure p3 that is reduced inside ink reservoir chamber 111 when a subsequent decompression process is not performed) When pressure reducing device 940 is complete, suction tube 941 is removed a welded, resulting in a state in which ink cartridge 14 can be shipped The rel air pressures pi to p3 is the relationship p2 < p3 < pi Because the air pressure mside packaging bag 930 is made lower tha inside ink reservoir chamber 111 as a result of the packaging space deco becomes nonuniform, so ink cannot be accurately supplied Moreover, damaged, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 flows to the outside o However, in this embodiment, the inside of packaging bag 930 is decompr air pressure is lower than the air pressure inside ink reservoir chamber 111, be deformed on the side of packaging bag 930 (revertible) Therefore, eve it is not used for long periods of time, it is possible to reduce situations in impossible to accurately supply ink due to the solidification of film 160, a prevent the damage of film 160
Because the air pressure inside of packaging bag 930 is made lower th inside ink reservoir chamber 111, gas that remains inside ink reservoir cha slight amount of gas that remains due to the subsequent decompression pr previously) can be gradually moved outside ink reservoir chamber 111 described above, film 160 is formed from nylon polyethylene, which permeable, so the air pressure of the space inside ink reservoir chambe pressure of the space inside packaging bag 930 and outside ink reservoir ch to transition to the equilibrium state, and the gas therefore moves to the o ink reservoir chamber 111 Accordingly, the deaeration of the ink store chamber 111 is promoted, and it becomes more difficult for air bubbles t printing quality can be favorably maintained In this embodiment, ink cartridge 14 is packaged in packaging bag 930 in the state in which protector 300 is attached to case 200, so it never ma with ambient air intake part 130 (or ink supply part 120) as packaging bag 9 decompression Valve open part 721a projects to the outside of ambient air if packaging bag 930 makes direct contact with valve open part 721a, val operates and the ambient air intake path is sometimes opened If the ambien opened, the ink inside ink reservoir chamber 111 leaks out Moreover, amb of frame part 110 With some conventional ink cartridges, ink was dispense case after the ink reservoir element was covered with the case (after the a cartridge is completely finished) With such a conventional ink cartridge, i prepare a frame and a case according to the amount of ink stored and th However, in this embodiment, case 200 is covered after ink is dispensed chamber 111 of ink reservoir element 100, so common parts can be use element 100 In other words, even if the shape of the case differs, ink res can be commonly used As a result, the manufacturing cost of ink cartridge Moreover, in ink cartridge 14, ink dispensing part 150 (ink dispen completely concealed by case 200 such that it cannot be seen from the outsi which ink spills outside as a result of the user accidentally removing ink di can be prevented
Next, the installation method of ink cartridge 14 into multifunction described with reference to Figure 40 Figure 40 is a diagram that shows th ink cartridge 14 is installed into multifunction device 1
When ink cartridge 14 is to be attached to multifunction device 1, pac first broken, and ink cartridge 14 is removed from the inside of packagi protector 300 is removed from case 200 The direction in which each in color, for black, and for large-capacity black) is installed into multifuncti same
First, the internal structure of refill unit 13 of multifunction device 1 with reference to Figure 40(a) In refill unit 13, as described above, needle lower portion of the side of back surface 56 of case 40, and needle installation direction F (arrow F in Figure 40(a)) of ink cartridge 14 As is 40(c), this installation direction F is parallel to the longitudinal direction ( B, X-direction) of ink cartridge 14, which is installed into refill unit 1 t
Remaining ink detection sensor 57 is configured such that it does not ou signal to a control unit provided on multifunction device 1 when light r receives light that is emitted from light emitting part 57a and outputs (or signal to the control device when light that is emitted from light emitting and is not received by light receiving part 57b
As illustrated in Figure 40(a), when ink cartridge 14 (in the state in whi removed) is to be installed in multifunction device 1, ink cartridge 14 is inst supply part 120 is located below ambient air intake part 130 This st installation position (or first position) of ink cartridge 14 Moreover, in the state in which ink cartridge 14 is installed in multifun supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are seq from bottom to top, and ink supply part 120, detection part 140, and ambi 130 are formed on a single end surface As is clear from Figure 40(b), this
1 is the one side surface of case 200 positioned in the front in installation dir cartridge 14 is in the regular installation position Therefore, because in detection part 140, and ambient air intake part 130 are provided such tha (located close to each other) on a single end surface, remaining ink de needle 49, and passage 54, which are required on the side of multifunctio consolidated (located close to each other) onto a single surface (back s supply part 120 were provided on the bottom surface of ink cartridge 14 140 and ambient air intake part 130 were provided on the side surface of i would become necessary to establish needle 49 on the bottom surface side unit 13 and establish remaining ink detection sensor 57 and passage 54 on t surface (back surface 56) of case 40, and the scale of multifunction device 1 these were provided, being diversified (located relatively far away from eac in this embodiment, these parts are consolidated (located close to each oth (corresponding to remaining ink detection sensor 57 m this embodimen which the presence of ink is detected directly (method for detecting the a ink based on whether or not ink is present in the light path of the photode the ink could not be fully used with a configuration in which the in (corresponding to ink supply part 120 in this embodiment) and the irra irradiated by photodetector (detection part 140) are both provided bn a sin in this embodiment In other words, with a configuration in which the positioned below the ink supply opemng, the position of the ink supply relatively high, so ink that is stored below the ink supply opening is consumption efficiency thus diminishes With a configuration in which th positioned above the ink supply opening, the position of the irradiated part high, so a significant quantity of ink is left over when the photodetector det ink, and when the user is notified of the absence of ink based on the dete photodetector, the amount of ink that is left over becomes large However, i sensor arm 470 is used, so even if the irradiated part is provided in a relati the absence of ink can be detected in step with the timing in which the remaining ink becomes low, and the ink supply opening is provided m a lo is little leftover ink (The description is given out of place, but a remai method using sensor arm 470 will be described in detail below ) As long as the configuration of the ink cartridge is such that the ink provided on the bottom surface of the ink cartridge and the irradiated part side surface of the ink cartridge, ink will be fully used even if a method t the presence of ink is used However, in this case, there is the sepa multifunction device 1 increases in size In other words, only with the inve this embodiment can both the reduction of the scale of multifunction improvement of the full use of ink be realized r
95
214a2 and 224a2 As illustrated in Figure 40(a), a portion of the back surfa 14 is push part 200a, and this is a part that is pushed such that it makes co retaining member 61
As illustrated in Figure 40(b), when ink cartridge 14 is in the state in inside refill unit 13 in installation direction F, protrusion 55 is fitted into a case protruding grooves 214b2 and 224b2 Further, the tip of needle 49 i supply cap 600 of ink supply part 120 The movement of ink cartridge 1 direction (direction toward the back from the front side of Figure 40(b protrusion 55 and protruding grooves 214b2 and 224b2, and the movem direction is restricted by bottom plate part 42 and ceiling plate part 44 of re possible to prevent ink cartridge 14 from being inserted diagonally and pre detection sensor 57 and needle 49 from being damaged
When the door member 60 is rotated from the state of Figure 40 (b) in t arrow illustrated in Figure 40 (b), the pushing retaining member 61 of th contacts the push part 200a forming a portion of the back surface of the pushing the ink cartridge 14 m the installation direction F As the door me further, the door lock member 62 of the door member 60 fits into the lock 46 of the refill unit 13, completing the installation of the ink cartridge 14 ( 40 (c)) The middle point p illustrated in Figure 40 (c) is the central posit direction (height direction) of the ink cartridge 14 The position where the member 61 pushes the push part 200a is a position including the middle cartridge 14 and extending below the middle point p In other words, the provided at a position above the ink supply part 120 and below the ambient in the vertical direction Although illustration and description of this will be state of Figure 40 (c) is reached, the tip of the swing arm mechanism 44b parts 217a and 227a and retains the ink cartridge 14 Furthermore, since the remaining ink sensor 57 is inserted through formed by the case cutout parts 213 and 223 and the detection part 140 whe 14 is installed in the refill unit 13, the light emitting part 57a and the light of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 become positioned inside the becomes possible to prevent damage to the remaining ink detection sen preventing misdetection due to dirt, dust or the like adhering to the light em light receiving part 57b
Furthermore, since the pushing retaining member 61 is impelled by th described above, it can stably retain the ink cartridge 14 When the ink car installed (or is being installed) in the refill unit 13, the elastic force of the sp 650, 730 and 750 of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the ambient air inta act in the direction away from the side on which needle 49 is arranged (left in the direction opposite to the installation direction) As described a retaining member 61 is configured to have a greater elastic force than generated by the spring members 630, 650, 730 and 750, and is thus able t ink cartridge 14 once it has been installed Furthermore, the push part 200 by the pushing retaining member 61 is located substantially in the middl supply part 120 and the ambient air intake part 130, allowing a substantial force to be applied to the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air intake because the ink cartridge 14 is retained at three points in the installation d cartridge 14 - one point at the front of the refill unit 13 (the pushing reta and two points at the back of the refill unit 13 (the ink supply part 120 a intake part 130), with the imaginary line linking these three points formi isosceles triangle shape Thus, retaining the ink cartridge 14 by three poi cartridge 14 to be retained stably Furthermore, since the elastic force of the member 61 is used to retain the ink cartridge 14, the load on the surface o prescribed position The pivot of rotation of the door member 60 is located of the case 40, and the user performs the operation of opening and closing by manipulating the edge part of the door member 60 Thus, if the push pa at the upper part of the back surface of the ink cartridge 14, the point of a pushing retaining member 61 pushes the ink cartridge 14 will be at a dista of rotation of the door member 60, thus requiring a large force for' the use member On the other hand, if the push part 200a is arranged at the extrem back surface, for instance below the ink supply part 120, the user will b door member with minimum force, but since a point at the lower part of the pushed, the ink cartridge 14 may sometimes rotate and be pushed in tilted may not be inserted accurately into the ink supply part 120 However, accor embodiment, since the push part 200a is arranged below the middle p cartridge 14 in the height direction and above the position corresponding part 120, a large force is not required to operate the door member, making it install the ink cartridge at the prescribed location
Here, referring to Figure 41, the operation of the ink supply mecha ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1 will be described Figure 41 is a drawing illustrating the state wit 14 having been installed in the multifunction device 1 Since Figure 41 i purpose of explaining the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and mechanism 510, the case 200, the protrusion 55 of the multifunction dev have been omitted from the drawing
As illustrated in Figure 41, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in device 1 (inside the refill unit 13), the light emitting part 57a and the light (not illustrated) of the remaining ink detection sensor 57 are arra sandwiching the detection part 140 The detection part 140 consists With regard to the ink supply mechanism 500, when the ink cartridge 1 multifunction device 1, the needle 49 is inserted through the space surroun wall 606d of the supply cap 600, the insertion hole 605 of the supply cap 60 path 615 of the supply joint 600 in that order, and the tip of the needle 49 bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620, depressing the supply valve 62 supply valve 620 moves away from the joint contact part 613 of the supply an ink flow path The needle 49 communicates with a discharge opening the multifunction device 1 via ink extraction opening 52 and ink tube 53 F tip of the needle 49, a cutout 49a is formed for securing an ink flow path, path is secured by the cutout 49a even if the tip of the needle 49 contacts wall 621 of the supply valve 620
Here, the operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 when the su depressed by the needle 49 will be described The first supply spring 630 supply valve 620 (and supply slider 640), as described above, has a slig flexible part 633 On the other hand, there is no flexing in the spring flexi second supply spring 650 arranged on the opposite side of the supply slider supply spring 630 This serves to determine the flexing order of the first springs 630 and 650 In other words, the first supply spring 630 with the fle part 633 flexes more easily than the second supply spring 650, so that whe inserted, the first supply spring 630 flexes first, and the second supply thereafter
Here, the height of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the direction of dimensional error from the manufacturing of the various compone components there are, the more likely that dimensional error will occur supply slider 640 is brought into contact with the valve hook part 626 of 610, at least the error in the dimensions of the first supply spring 630 b operates in the direction of axis Ol of the ink supply mechanism 500 Furt diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 641 and the outside dia bottom parts 631 and 651 of the first and second supply springs 630 and 65 substantially equal Thus, it becomes possible to reduce misalignmen orthogonal to axis Ol (the up-down direction in Figure 41) when the first members 630 and 650 are arranged on the slider pedestal part 644 of the Furthermore, while the external shape of the valve outer circumferentia supply valve 620 is formed slightly smaller than the inside diameter of the i 116, since the valve protruding part 622a is formed outward from circumferential wall 622 of the supply valve 620, it becomes possible to pre in the direction of displacement when the supply valve 620 operates in th Ol Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis Ol becomes m
Furthermore, when the valve bottom wall 621 of the supply valve 620 i
1 needle 49 and moves in the direction of valve seat 660 (πghtwar accompanying this movement, the first supply spring 630 is flexibly d become compressed, whereupon the supply slider 640 moves in the direc 660 (the direction opposite to the impelling direction of the first supply spri supply spring 650), and the second supply spring undergoes flexible deform the state illustrated in Figure 41 Once the ink cartridge 14 has been installed in the case 40 of the multi the first and second supply springs 630 and 650 also undergo elastic defor ink flow path K indicated by arrow K The ink flow path K is a flow path f ink reservoir chamber 111 (see Figure 14), second supply communicati supply communicating hole 421, first cover through-hole 683 (and second c 684) of cσver 680, first valve seat through-hole 662b and second valve seat of valve seat 660, valve seat communicating groove 664 of valve seat 660, r
100
Here, the operation of the supply joint 610 when the needle 49 is i supply joint 610 will be described When the needle 49 is press-fitted into t flow path 615b through the step part flow path 615a, the joint protruding pa the needle 49 due to the friction between its own inner circumferential sur outer circumferential surface of the needle 49 and is displaced in the directi the right in Figure 41) of the needle 49 (displaced into the contact part flow the joint contact part 613 has a structure cut out into a countersunk shape, s of the joint protruding part 614 in the direction of insertion of the needle 49 directly to the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613 In other words, the ti contact part 613 is hardly displaced in the direction of insertion, but is slig direction away from the needle 49 Thus, the shape change of the accompanying insertion of the needle 49 is such that the joint contact parts away from each other Assuming the joint contact part 613 had a shape wit surface going from the inner circumferential surface 614a of the joint prot the tip 613a of the joint contact part 613, as the needle 49 was inserted, t part 614 would deform so as to be displaced in the direction of insertion of deformation of the joint protruding part 614 would be directly transmitted t part 613, and the joint contact part 613 would be displaced in the dire together with the joint protruding part 614 As a result, the insertion strok for forming an ink flow path between the supply valve 620 and the join would become longer, so the needle 49 would have to be made longer F needle 49 becomes longer, it becomes more likely to be damaged by c members, and the length of the ink supply mechanism 500 in the dire becomes longer, thus increasing its size However, in the present embodim contact part 613 is displaced in a direction substantially orthogonal to insertion of the needle 49, the stroke for forming an ink flow path does no state
When the ink cartridge 14 is removed form the multifunction device 1, withdrawn, the ink present in the vicinity of the ink flow path 615 of the su contact part flow path 615c and the protruding part flow path 615b) flows 600 (leftward in Figure 41) and flows out into the step part flow path 615 the quantity of ink which flows out into the step part flow path 615a is retained by the capillary force of the step part of the step part flow pat outflow to the outside of the ink cartridge 14 can be reduced Furthermore, from the step part flow path 615a, since the opening part of the ink stora supply cap 600 is wider than the opening 612c of the step part flow path 61 out flows into the ink storing part 607 of the ink supply cap 600 The possible to reliably prevent ink from flowing out of the ink cartridge 14
Next, the ambient air intake mechanism 510 side will be described
1 intake mechanism 510, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multi the valve opening part 721a of the ambient air valve 720 contacts the bac case 40, depressing the ambient air valve 720 As a result, the ambient air v away from the joint contact part 713 of the ambient air joint 710, formi intake path L as illustrated by arrow L in the drawings Furthermore, when part 721a of the ambient air valve 720 contacts and is depressed by the ba joint stroke part 714 of the ambient air joint 710 contacts the back surfac skirt part 714 undergoes flexible deformation so as to expand (or contract) result, it becomes tightly held against the back surface 56, blocking the ou the joint skirt part 714 In the back surface 56 on the inside of the joint skir formed a passage 54 which serves as a passage for taking in ambient air, into the ink reservoir chamber 111 via this passage 54
The operation of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 when the ambie t
102
ambient air valve 720 and the inside diameter of the slider outer circumfe the ambient air valve 720 are formed to be substantially equal Thus, misalignment in the direction of displacement when the ambient air slider direction of axis 02 of the ambient air intake mechanism 510 can be preve the inside diameter of the slider outer circumferential wall 741 and the ou the spring bottom parts 731 and 751 of the first and second ambient air sp and 750 are formed to be substantially equal Thus, it becomes po misalignment in the direction orthogonal to axis 02 (the up-down direct when the first and second ambient air springs 730 and 750 are arranged on part 744 of the ambient air slider 740
Furthermore, while the outside shape of the valve outer circumferenti ambient air valve 720 is formed slightly smaller than the inside diameter intake element 117, since valve protruding part 722a is formed outward fr circumferential wall 722 of the ambient air valve 720, misalignment i displacement when the ambient air valve 720 operates in the direction o prevented Therefore, telescoping operation in the direction of axis 02 intake mechanism 510 is stabilized
Furthermore, when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed by the valve and moves in the direction of protruding part 811 (πghtward in Figure 4 movement, the first ambient air spring 730 undergoes flexible deformatio compressed, and when the ambient air valve 720 is depressed, the ambi moves in the direction of protruding part 811 and the second ambie undergoes flexible deformation This state is the state illustrated in Figure 41
When the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the case 40 of the multifunction and second ambient air springs 730 and 750 also undergo elastic deform ambient air intake path L illustrated by arrow L The ambient air intake pat f
103
This flow path is the main flow path through which the majority of the Furthermore, the space between the valve outer circumferential wall 722 valve 720 and the inner circumferential surface 810 of the ambient air intak forms part of the ambient air intake path Subsequently, as illustrated in Fig passes through the first ambient air communicating chamber 431, comm 433a, ambient air connection passage 433, communicating opening 433b, communicating chamber 432, second ambient air communicating hole 435 air communicating hole 436, and is admitted mside the ink reservoir cham ambient air intake path L is opened, air is taken in such that the inside o chamber 111 is brought to ambient air pressure
As described above, the ink flow path K and the ambient air intake when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 operation of the ink supply mechanism 500 and the ambient air intake mec that they operate smoothly and without misalignment relative to the axes installation of the ink cartridge 14 is made easier, while allowing the sup intake of ambient air to be carried out reliably
Next, referring to Figure 42 and Figure 43, the method of detecting t remaining in the ink reservoir chamber 111 will be described Figure illustrating the operation of the sensor arm 470 according to the quantity o the ink reservoir chamber 111 Figure 42 (a) illustrates the state with re Figure 42 (b) illustrates the state with no remaining ink (ink empty) Figu schematically illustrating the operating principle of the sensor arm 470
The direction of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is determined by the co buoyancies and the gravities acting on the right side portion (on the side o part 473c) and the left side (on the side of the balance part 471) Ho simplify the explanation, the description will now be made assuming that large amount of ink is stored in the ink reservoir chamber 111 (in the s stored is at least above the level of the lower ends of the inner circumfer 415a, 415b, 416a and 416b), since the balance part 471 of the sensor arm 4 resin material with lower specific gravity than the specific gravity of the generated on the balance part 471 increases, and the balance part 471 float the balance part 471 is inside the ink, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the co gravity and buoyancy generated on the balance part 471 cause a rotating f in the clockwise direction (the direction of arrow Gl in Figure 43), but the 473c comes into contact with the arm supporting part 143 which rises fro 141a of the detection part 140 (enclosure part 141) and is thus placed in a the optical path between the light emitting part 57a and the light receivi remaining ink detection sensor 57 This is the state when ink is pre controller (not illustrated) of the multifunction device 1 discriminates the pr
As the ink inside the ink reservoir chamber 111 passes through the in decreases in quantity, the liquid surface I of the ink drops As the liquid s drops, the blocking arm part 473 c emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink, the balance part 471 also emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink Whe 471 emerges on the liquid surface I of the ink, the buoyancy generated o 471, which causes the sensor arm 470 to rotate in the clockwise directio arrow Gl in Figure 43) and the gravity generated on the balance part 471, sensor arm 470 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction (the directio Figure 43) balance each other out, so the overall combined force is balance the liquid surface I of the ink drops further, the balance part 471 moves do the liquid surface I, so the sensor arm 470 rotates counterclockwise This causes the shielding arm part 473 c to move upward away from the arm su and an optical path is created between the light emitting part 57a and light r i
As illustrated in Figure 42 (b), in the out-of-ink state, there is still some ink reservoir chamber 111 The ink surface I at this time is slightly higher t forming the bottom of the ink reservoir chamber 111 Furthermore, as dis ink reservoir chamber 111 and the ink supply part 120 communicate v chamber 426 (see Figure 15) delimited by the supply partition wall 422, an chamber 111 and the ink supply chamber 426 communicate7 via th communicating hole 423 positioned below the bottom part 400bl provi partition wall 422 When the liquid surface I of the ink becomes lower than communicating hole 423, ambient air enters the area inside the supply making it impossible to supply ink Thus, in the present embodiment, t immediately before ink supply becomes impossible as "ink empty", the designed to rotate so that the out-of-ink state is detected when the liquid sur above the second supply communicating hole 423 In this way, positioning communicating hole 423 below the part 400bl forming the bottom part o chamber 111, it becomes possible to reliably prevent ink from running out b detected Furthermore, when an out-of-ink state is discriminated, there is the bottom part 400bl of the ink reservoir chamber 111, with ink remaini concave part space 424a, which is a relatively narrow space formed at a l bottom part 400bl in the ink reservoir chamber 111, so that the quant remaining when an out-of-ink state is detected is extremely small, eliminati
Once the out-of-ink discrimination has been made, to indicate to the use out of ink, the out-of-ink lamp is illuminated or audio is used to inform device is out of ink It is also possible to use a counter provided in the contr the number of times ink has been discharged and to detect the quantity of additionally employing a software counter which hypothetically determines out of ink 120, ambient air intake part 130 and detection part 140 are arranged to surface of the ink cartridge 14 This allows the various mechanisms (ink s ambient air intake mechanism and remaining ink detection mechanis together on the refill unit 13 of the multifunction device 1, preventing the unit 13 from becoming complicated, and also reducing its size Furtherm part 120, being a part which supplies ink by causing it to flow out to the m 1, is preferably arranged at the lower side of the ink cartridge 14 so as to complete utilization of the ink, while the ambient air intake part 130, being in ambient air into the ink cartridge 14, is preferably arranged at the upp cartridge 14 Thus, from the standpoint of space efficiency, the dete preferably arranged between the ink supply part 120 and the ambient air i the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment configured in this manner, the center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is arranged above (or at the sa detection part 140, the length of the space between the balance part 417 a part 472 will become greater and the sensor arm 470 will become larger quantity of ink will decline accordingly On the other hand, if the positio rotation of the sensor arm 470 is arranged below the ink supply part 120, t of the balance part 471 will become extremely small, making detection of i Thus, in the present embodiment, the position of the center of rotation of t (the "pivot" consisting of the attachment part 472) is arranged above the i and below the detection part 140 Consequently, as described above, ink detected and reduction of the ink reservoir capacity due to increased size 470 is avoided
Furthermore, in the ink cartridge 14 of the present embodiment, if the b arranged in the vicinity of the supply partition wall 422, the balance part 4 second supply communicating hole 423 and the vibration caused by operat ink reservoir chamber 111, will decrease Thus, in the present embodiment, center of rotation of the sensor arm 470 is placed in the vicinity of the su 422 and the balance part 471 is positioned at the middle of the ink reservo the Y direction, avoiding the aforementioned enlargement of the sensor effects on ink flow
When the sensor arm 470 is attached to the arm sandwiching' part 42 available, as illustrated in Figure 42 (a), the top end surface of the shield (the upper end surface in Figure 42) is positioned substantially parallel to th the ink In this state, when the liquid surface of the ink drops and reaches th the top end surface of the shielding arm 473 c, the surface tension of the in retain the shielding arm 473 If the force by which the surface tension of shielding arm 473c is greater than the buoyancy of the balance part 473a, t will not operate properly
Thus, in the present embodiment, the top end surface forming the outsi part 140 of the shielding arm 473c is given an angle so as to slope down portion of the shielding arm 473 c that is substantially parallel to the liquid Thus, the force exerted by the surface tension of the ink on the shielding reduced, allowing the sensor arm 470 to operate normally
Here, referring to Figure 44, the case where the ink cartridge 14 is in orientation will be discussed Figure 44 is a cross-sectional view illustrati the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multifunction device 1 in a wrong orie
As illustrated in Figure 44, when the ink cartridge 14 is inserted into t and bottom are reversed relative to the proper installation orientation, th protruding parts 214a and 224a will collide with the tip of the protrusion 5 with the top and bottom reversed from the proper installation orientation, t 120 will be located above the ambient air intake part 130, resulting in an in the tip of the valve opening part 721a projecting outward from the ambient and the tip of the needle 49 The needle 49 is a member for extracting the cartridge 14 and supplying the ink to the ink jet recording head (not illustrat cases where needle 49 is damaged or deformed, ink is not accurately sup is not performed accurately Thus, it is not desirable for the needle 49 deformed by collision of the needle 49 and the valve opening part 7 providing a difference between projection distance t8 and projection distan above, collision between the needle 49 and the valve opening part 721a can making it possible to prevent damage or deformation of the needle 49 and be reliably supplied
Furthermore, the position of the through-hole (detection window) form part 140 and the case cutouts 213 and 223 in the vertical direction (the up- Figure 44) is displaced slightly from the center, so that when the ink cartri upside-down from the proper installation orientation, the remaining ink d may collide with the outer wall of the case 200, which may damage t detection sensor 57 However, since a difference is provided between proj and projection distance t9, it becomes possible to prevent damage to t detection sensor 57 due to collision with the outer wall of the case 200, ma accurately detect the remaining quantity of ink Next, referring to Figure 45, the method of removing the ink cartr installed state in multifunction device 1 will be described Figure 45 is a d the method of removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction device 1
As illustrated in Figure 45 (a), to remove the ink cartridge 14 from device 1 (refill unit 13), the lock release lever 63 of the door 41 is rotated f in Figure 45 (a)) (rotated m the direction of the arrow in Figure 45 (a)) A when the lock release lever 63 is rotated, the engagement between the doo (latch part 226b is to the rear in Figure 45 (b) and is thus not illustrated) o state of Figure 45 (b)) When the door 41 is rotated further forward (in t arrow in Figure 45 (b)) from the state of Figure 45 (b), the latch parts 216 case 200 are pulled out by the curved part 65b of the pullout member 65, a ink cartridge 14 projects from inside the case 40 as a result (the state of Fi this state, the user can easily remove the ink cartridge 14 Thus/ the ope cartridge 14 replacement operation is improved
Here, referring to Figure 46, the mechanism for preventing dripping o cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1 will be describ drawing showing the state of removing the ink cartridge 14 from the mult and a front view of the ink cartridge 14 Figure 46 (a) and Figure 46 illustrating the state change when the ink cartridge 14 is removed, and Fig front view of the ink cartridge 14
As discussed above, when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the multi the needle 49 is inserted inside the ink supply part 120 The ink suppl includes a valve mechanism impelled by a first supply spring 630 and a sec 650, so when removing the ink cartridge 14 from the multifunction devi from the state of Figure 46 (a) to the state of Figure 46 (b)), ink may adher tip of the needle 49, or in the worst case, ink may flow out from the ink sup the valve 620 moves in the direction such that it contacts with the joint cont the impelling force of the first supply spring 630 and the second supply sp needle 49 is removed from the supply joint 610, ink is pushed out in the di flows out from the protruding part flow path 615b to the step part flow path may stick to the protruding tip 49 of the needle or flow outside the ink Consequently, when the ink cartridge 14 is removed, the ink adheπng to th 49 may drip down in the form of ink drops, or ink may flow down from t part 120 side surface of the case projecting parts 214a and 224a Furtherm projecting parts 214a and 224a and the ink supply part 120 are positioned each other, it is easy to make the ink dripping from the ink supply part 120 projecting parts 214a and 224a As illustrated in Figure 46 (c), the insertion hole 605 of the supply supply opening into which the needle 49 is inserted and through which ink thickness til in the widthwise direction (the left-right direction of Fig direction) of ink cartridge 14 of the case projecting parts 214a and 224a is the diameter tlO of the insertion hole 605 (The diameter of needle 49 is for narrower than the diameter tlO of the through-hole 605 ) Furthermore, (form the Y direction), the insertion hole 605 is accommodated entirely occupied by the case projecting parts 214a and 224a Thus, when the i removed, even if ink adhering to the tip of the needle 49 drips down or from the insertion hole 605, the dripped ink can be caught by the case pro and 224a Furthermore, since the case projecting parts 214a and 224a proje the left-right direction of Figure 46 (a) and (b)) in the installation orientati 14, and the surface on the ink supply part 120 side is formed to be substa adhering to the case projecting parts 214a and 224a can be prevented fro down As a result, it is possible to prevent ink from dripping down into and of the refill unit 13 If the inside of the refill unit 13 is dirtied, the ink ca dirtied during installation or removal of the cartridge 14, thus making the However, such problems can be avoided by preventing the ink from adheri the refill unit 13 as much as possible
While the configuration described above is desirable for preventio configuration is not limited thereto, so long as, as illustrated in Figure projecting parts 214a and 224a are at least partially located over the line p of the insertion hole 605, a configuration of this sort can contribute to dirtying of the refill unit 13 In this case, the ink retaining force of the ca 214a and 224a is weakened, so it can be assumed that ink which has been projecting parts 214a and 224a may drip down into the refill unit 13 cartridge 14 to be replaced is hardly ever left for a long time inside the refil with the tip of the needle 49 having been withdrawn from the ink supp rather removed quickly from the refill unit 13, so such a problem is Incidentally, even when the case projecting parts 214a and 224a are form the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the wrong orientation, it will collide protrusion 55, preventing incorrect installation Furthermore, even if the ca 214a and 224a are not accurately positioned on line p, so long as they are below the ink supply part 120, they will be able to catch the ink dripping supply part 120 to some extent, making it possible to prevent dirtying of the unit 13 to a greater extent than if the case projecting parts 214a and 224a we Next, referring to Figure 47, the structure, which reduces the adhes detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the ink ca described Figure 47 is a drawing illustrating the structure, which reduces t to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of the detection unit 140 of the Figure 47 (a) illustrates the state of installing or removing the ink cartrid refill unit 13 (multifunction device 1), Figure 47 (b) is a drawing which illu where the detection part 140 of the ink cartridge 14 is formed, and F perspective view of ink cartridge 14 The ink cartridge 14 of Figure 47 ( simplified fashion without showing the detailed structure, as this figure ser outer shape of the ink cartridge 14 and its positional relationship to the detec As illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartridge 14 is installed in the refill unit 13, ink may spatter from the projecting tip of the ink supp where the ink cartridge 14 is installed), the ink may flow back and spatter of ink does not occur every time the ink cartridge 14 is installed or remove time no ink may spatter
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (a), when the ink cartridge 14 is orientation, the detection part 140 is positioned at a position correspondin ink detection sensor 57, so the detection part 140 is positioned above the i (or needle 49) The majority of the ink spattering from the needle 49 and i spatters downward (opposite to the direction of detection part 140) under i the adhesion of ink to the detection part 140 can be reduced simply by arra part 140 above the ink supply part 120 Furthermore, the detection surfaces formed in a plane parallel to the line jointing the center of the detection pa insertion hole 605 (see Figure 47 (b)) The majority of the ink spatter insertion hole 605 spatters in substantially linear fashion, so even if ink s the cap insertion hole 605, not much ink will adhere to the detection surfac making it possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 14
Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (b), if the ink cartridge 14 is re and placed such that the positional relationship of the ink supply part 12 intake part 130 is upside down relative to the installation orientation of th (the orientation of Figure 47 (a)), ink may drip down from the insertion hole cap 600 of the ink supply part 120 Since the ink dripping form the inserti under its own weight, it will flow out in substantially linear fashion in t detection part 140 and adhere to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b of 140
However, when the detection part 140 is in a state arranged below the part 130 and above the ink supply part 120 (the state of Figure 47 (b)), the 140a and 140b of the detection part 140 will be arranged vertically (the t
113
lower part and the ambient air intake part 130 is located at the upper part Figure 47 (a)), so even if there is ink adhering to the detection part 140 du removal of the ink cartridge 14, the ink will flow to the ink supply part 1 possible to reduce the adhesion of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 1 discussed above, the edge part 40 of the detection surfaces 140a and 140b a 100a of the frame part 110 is formed substantially as a right angle, so i detection surfaces 140a and 140b can more easily flow downward due t capillary force of the edge part 140c Therefore, adhesion of ink to the detec and 140b can be reduced Furthermore, as illustrated in Figure 47 (c), the detection part 140 is a case 200 and a space into which the light emitting part 57a and light receiv remaining ink detection sensor 57 enter is formed on both sides of the detec and 140b by the case cutouts 213 and 223 Thus, the detection part 140 is c 200, so even if ink should spatter, adhesion of the spattered ink to the detec and 140b can1 be reduced Moreover, since a portion of the ink supply outward from the case 200, in the installation orientation of ink cartridg Figure 47 (a)), the distance to the detection part 140 becomes farther Thus, spattered ink does not reach the detection part 140, making it possible to re of ink to the detection surfaces 140a and 140b Furthermore, the case pro and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b are formed at the en part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 are located between the case pro and 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b, and the case projecti 224a and the case projecting parts 214b and 224b extend further outward t part 120 Thus, if the ink cartridge 14 is inadvertently dropped, the ink supp prevented from contacting the surface, which the ink cartridge 14 is drop possible to reduce outflow of ink from the ink supply part 120 due to the sh r
114
embodiment, case 40 is arranged in the multifunction device 1, but it i provide a multifunction device 1 wherein case 2040 is arranged instead of is a cross-sectional view showing the simplified cross-section of cases 40 a
Figure 49 (a) is a simplified cross-sectional view of case XXXXIXa-XXXXIXa of Figure 48 (a), and Figure 49 (b) is a simplified c of case 2040 along line XXXXIXb-XXXXIXb of Figure 48 ' (b) Fi cross-section of needle forming member 48 and ink cartridge 14, with t making up the cases 40 and 2040 being omitted from the illustration Furth 48 to 50, a color ink cartridge is illustrated as ink cartridge 14c, a black in as ink cartridge 14kl, and a large capacity black ink cartridge is illustrat 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 48 (a), case 40 is configured to accommodate so that they are aligned in case 40 Regarding the arrangement of the four i color ink cartridges 14c are arranged side by side, and a large capacity 14k2 or a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjacent thereto In othe capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 or the black ink cartridge 14kl is selectiv at an end position in the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the le Figure 48 (a)) The case 40 illustrated in Figure 48 (a) accommodates a la ink cartridge 14k2 As illustrated in Figure 48 (b), case 2040 is configured to accommodate cartridges Regarding the arrangement of the four ink cartridges, three color are arranged side by side, and a black ink cartridge 14kl is arranged adjace words, just as in case 40, the black ink cartridge 14kl is accommodated at the direction of alignment of the ink cartridges (the left-right direction in Fi Since case 40 allows both a large capacity black ink cartridge 14k cartridge 14kl to be installed, it is formed to accommodate the thickness o illustrated in Figure 11 and the height of the vertical wall parts 2220b to 2 case member 2220 illustrated in Figure 13
Furthermore, case 40 allows a black ink cartridge 14kl or a large cartridge 14k2 to be installed selectively, while case 2040 only allows instal cartridge 14kl This implies providing users with two types of multifun already discussed above, since users whose frequency of text printing is l large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2, it is preferable to provide such us multifunction device 1 that does not allow installation of a large capacity 14k2 Furthermore, since case 2040 for installing black ink cartridges 14 installing large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 differ only slightly in e majority of the die used can be shared between the two, providing for a cost
As illustrated in Figure 49 (a), when the ink cartridges 14c and 14k2 are case 40, a needle 49 penetrates into the ink supply mechanism 500 o cartridges 14c and 14k2 The gaps tl6 between the needles 49 penetra cartridges 14c are equal, while the gap tl7 between the needle 49 penetra capacity black ink cartridge 14k2 and the needle 49 penetrating the a cartridge 14c is formed to have a longer distance than gap tl6 The differ tl6 and gap tl7 corresponds to the difference between the height of the 210b to 21Oe of the first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the he wall parts 221 Ob to 221 Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figur
As illustrated in Figure 49 (b), when the ink cartridges 14c and 14kl inside the case 2040, a needle 49 penetrates inside the ink supply mechani the ink cartridges 14c and 14kl The gap tl6 between needles 49 penetrat cartridges 14c and the gap tl7 between the needle 49 penetrating into the 14kl and the needle 49 penetrating into the adjacent color ink cartridge 1 length as gaps tl6 and tl7 of case 40 This is because the state o this is because' the position of the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartri position of the ink supply part 120 of ink cartridge 14k2 are the same relat of the ink supply part 120 of the ink cartridge 14c As a result, identic members 48 can be provided in case 40 and case 2040 even through the lat tl5 of cases 40 and 2040 may differ, making the needle forming mem component and making it possible to reduce costs when fabricating two c case 2040
Furthermore, as discussed above, the ink supply mechanism 500 is a impelled by the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 650, cartridge 14 is removed from the multifunction device 1, ink may flow supply part 120 or, in the worst case, ink may spatter around The needle continuously, without any partition plates being provided between the needl spatters from the ink supply part 120, the spattered ink ends up adheri needles 49 The needles 49 are parts, which supply ink to the multifunction a different ink color is mixed into a needle 49, color change will occur d printing quality will decline In the present embodiment, the black ink is a while the color inks consist of dye type inks This is because black ink is text printing, and is thus made from a pigment type ink with low permeab order to make the edges of the characters clear, while color ink is used p printing, so it is made from a dye type ink with high permeability into pape the granularity of dots less apparent and improve the appearance of the col there is little effect of color change when color inks are mixed together, wh with another color ink, the effect of color change becomes greater, so it i black ink to be mixed with other color inks Furthermore, when mixing wit has been confirmed, generally, recovery processing (purging) involving for ink is carried out, but since ink is wasted for the recovery processing, 49 Therefore, ' decline in printing quality can be suppressed, as can the amounts of ink for recovery processing
Next, referring to Figure 50, the state of installation of the large c cartridge 14k2 or black ink cartridge 14kl and color ink cartridges 14c i described Figure 50 is a simplified cross-section illustrating in simplified installation of ink cartridges 14c, 14kl and 14k2 inside case 40 Figure 5 state of ink cartridges 14kl and 14c installed in case 40 and Figure 50 (b) i of ink cartridges 14k2 and 14c installed in case 40
As illustrated in Figure 50 (a), in the bottom plate part 42 and ceiling p refill unit 13 (case 40), there are formed accommodating grooves 42cl to 44c4 capable respectively of accommodating the case welded parts 216, 22 case welded parts 217, 227 and 1217 of case 200 or case 1200 Accommod to 42c4 and 44c 1 to 44c4 are all formed to the same shape
Furthermore, the space between accommodating grooves 42c 1 and 4 between accommodating grooves 42c2 and 42c3 provide a separation dista space between accommodating grooves 42c3 and 42c4 provides a separ longer than distance tl2 This is because, as discussed above, the black in formed with a larger outer shape than the other color ink cartridges 14c, so t 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the black ink cartridge 14kl are at a the difference between distance tl2 and distance tl3 in the direction away fr part 120 and ambient air intake part 130 of the other color ink cartridges direction in Figure 50) The difference between distance tl2 and distance the difference between gap tl6 and gap tl7 between needles 49 desc corresponds to the difference between the higher of verticals wall parts 21 first case member 210 illustrated in Figure 8 and the height of vertical w 221Oe of the first case member 2210 illustrated in Figure 13, or the d ink cartridge 14kl and the large capacity black ink cartridge 14k2
As illustrated in Figure 50 (b), when a large capacity black ink cartridg in the refill unit 13, the space that would be formed when a black ink installed becomes occupied Furthermore, the positions of the ink sup ambient air intake part 130 are the same when ink cartridge 14kl is insta cartridge 14k2 is installed Thus, the same case 40 can be used with black i and 14k2, making it possible to reduce fabrication costs
Next, referring to Figure 51, the combination of components making u and 2200 will be described Figure 51 is a schematic drawing, which sche the combination of case members 210, 220, 1210, 2210 and 2220
Figure 51 (a) is a schematic drawing of case 200 According to the pre case 200 comprises first and second case members 210 and 220, with the first and second case members 210 and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts
220b to 22Oe of the first and second case members 210 and 220, the left Figure 51 (a)) being respectively tl 8
Figure 51 (b) is a schematic drawing of case 2200 Case 2200 compris case members 2210 and 2220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 2220 (the height of vertical wall parts 2210b to 221Oe and 2220b to 22 second case members 2210 and 2220, the left-right direction in Fig respectively tl 9, which is approximately twice the thickness of tl 8
Figure 51 (c) is a schematic drawing of case 1200 Case 1200 compris case members 1210 and 220, with the thicknesses of the first and second c and 220 (the height of vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe and 220b to 22 second case members 1210 and 220, the left-right direction in Figure 51(c) first case member 1210 and tl 8 for the second case member 220
Thus, according to the present embodiment, three types of cases - 200, different outer shape sizes
Namely, so long as the thickness of one side (the first case member members making up the largest first ink cartridge (case 2200) is greater th one side (the first case member 210) of the case members making up th cartridge (case 200), and the thickness of the other side (the second case me case members making up the largest first ink cartridge is greater than th other side (the second case member 220) of the case members making up th cartridge, three types of cases with different outer shape sizes can be fabrica members The conditions described above will be referred to as the first con further conditions to these first conditions, four types of cases can be fa case members This will be described in detail later
Cases 200, 1200 and 2200 consist of resm material and are manufac molding Thus, a die corresponding to each case 200, 1200 and 2200 is types of dies being necessary if dies are fabricated for all the cases Namel 1200 and 2200 have a space inside them, at least two members are necessar of them, for instance, a vessel main body open on one surface and a lid me that opening Thus, with three cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different members are necessary
However, since dies are expensive, it is desirable to share them as much present embodiment, the second case member 220 for black is made comm case member 220 for color Thus, a special die is not necessary for the se 220 for black, providing a reduction in costs Moreover, the first case mem merely involves making the first case member 210 for color deeper and pro Thus, the tip side of the vertical wall parts 1210b to 121Oe past the rib 121 member 1210 used for black has the same shape as the tip side of the vertic to 21Oe of the first case member 210 used for color Therefore, the first c case members 210, 1201 and 2210 In this way, even when there are mu cartridges 144c, 14kl and 14k2, a cost reduction can be achieved by usin much as possible
Furthermore, in cases 200, 1200 and 2200 of different size from through-holes that allow the ink supply part 120 and ambient air intake par the outside are made the same shape, and substantially semi-circular case 212, 221, 222, 1211, 1212, 2211, 2212, 2221 and 2222 corresponding to through-holes are formed in the same substantially semi-circular shape member 210, second case member 220, first case member 1210 for black, 2210 for large capacity black and second case member 2220 for large partially common structure can be used for each of the dies, reducing the
Figure imgf000122_0001
In the present embodiment, case 1200 was made from the second cas case 200 and a first case member 1210 formed to substantially the same sha member of case 2200 However, as illustrated in Figure 51 (d), it is also po case 1200α from the first case member 210 of case 200 and a second c formed to substantially the same shape as the second case member of cas vertical wall parts 210b to 21Oe and 220b to 22Oe of case members 210 and be substantially equal in height, and since the vertical wall parts 210b to 22Oe of case members 2210 and 2220 are formed to be substantially eq outside shape sizes of the case 1200a and case 1200 are substantially the sa
Furthermore, it is possible to simply create a case consisting of a combi member 210 and second case member 2220 or a case consisting of a combi member 2210 and second case member 220 as the case for black In other the combination of case members allows three cases to be created - a smal large case for lager capacity black and a medium sized case for bla As illustrated in Figure 52 (a), the ink cartridge 3014 of the seco configured with a different location of the ambient air intake part 130 as c cartridge 14 of the first embodiment In the ink cartridge 3014 of the se ambient air is taken into the ink cartridge 3014 through an ambient air in formed in a labyrinth shape going from a through-hole 3130 formed on the case 3200
As illustrated in Figure 52 (b), the refill unit 3013 of the seco configured with the position of the pushing retaining member 3061 provid being lower than the position of the pushing retaining member 61 provided the first embodiment This is because there is no air intake part on the sid the pushing retaining member 3061 of the ink cartridge 3014 of the secon thus the elastic force acting when the ink cartridge 3014 is installed in the r elastic force due to the first supply spring 630 and second supply spring 65 lower part of the ink cartridge 3014 Thus, in order to stably install the i inside the refill unit 3013, the pushing retaining member 3061 and the ink s configured to be substantially on the same line in the horizontal direct direction in Figure 52 (b)) Being positioned substantially on the same lin which the elastic force acts is also substantially on the same line, reducin cartridge 3014 and allowing it to be stably installed The ink cartridge 3014 of the second embodiment may comprise an ink
100 inside it, or may be configured such that ink is stored inside the case 32
Next, referring to Figure 53, the third and fourth embodiments will be 53 is a perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of the ink ca 5014 of the third and fourth embodiments Figure 53 (a) is a perspective vi outward appearance of ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment, and perspective view illustrating the outward appearance of ink cartridge 5 4132 is glued to the ink cartridge 4014 to prevent deaeration and outflow o ink cartridge 4014 before use To use the ink cartridge 4014, the seal mem off, and then the cartridge is installed in the multifunction device 1
The detection part 4140 (irradiated part) is formed projecting outw surface extending substantially in the vertical direction of the ink cartridge direction in Figure 53 (a)), and below that is formed the ink supply part 41 opening 4121 into which needle 49 is inserted is formed on the project supply part 4120 The ink cartridge 4014 of the third embodiment does n corresponding to ink reservoir element 100, and stores the ink directly insid
On the right side of Figure 53(a), there is a cross-sectional diagram of line within the figure As illustrated in this figure, within the ink supply p joint 4122 that forms the insertion part into which the needle 49 is inser which fills the opening of the joint 4122 and which is arranged in the dire side of the ink cartridge 4014 of this joint 4122, and a spring component this valve 4123 in the direction of joint 4122 As a result, the valve mechani closed the ink supply port 4121 is formed Also, the partition wall 4125 tha side of the ink cartridge 4014 and the ink supply part 4120 is formed as a s ink cartridge 4014 itself As illustrated in Figure 53(a), this partition wall 4 to store the valve mechanism
As illustrated in Figure 53(b), the ink cartridge 5014 in the fourth exam is used in lieu of the ink supply part 4120 in the third example of embodi ink supply part 120 of the first example of embodiment and the similarly part 5120 The remaining structure is the same as the ink cartridge in the embodiment, and therefore, the detailed explanation of this will be omitted
The detection part 4140 of the third and fourth examples of embodime include these
Next, the fifth example of embodiment will be described while referring 55 Figure 54 is an angled view of the case 200 of the ink cartridge 14 in th embodiment, and Figure 55 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state cartridge 14 of the fifth example of embodiment has been attached within The case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment is constructed such that i be different in relation to the case protruding parts 214a and 224a of th embodiment Therefore, the structure other than the edge part of the cas 214a and 224a of the fifth example of embodiment is the same as that of th of the first example of embodiment, and using the same references for identical to the first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will b
The case 200 of the fifth example of embodiment forms the second protr and 224a3 which protrude in the direction of the case protruding parts 214b direction in Figure 54) towards the case protruding parts 214a and 214b second protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3, the case protruding parts 214a a the truncated L (or V or U) shaped step 214a4 and 224a4 (concave part) as view (in relation to the first case component 210, when seen from the top of downwards, or in relation to the second case component 220, when seen fr Figure 54 looking upwards) (see Figure 55)
As illustrated in Figure 55, when the ink cartridge 14 that is form protruding parts 214a3 and 224a3 is attached to the refill unit 13 upside do oπentation), the leading edge of the protrusion 55 on the case 40 side will 214a4 and 224a4 (the step 224a4 is not illustrated in the figure) Therefor the ink cartridge 14 upside down, because the protrusion 55 will correctl 214a4 and 224a4, for instance, it is possible to consistently prevent probl r
124
The steps 214a4 and 224a4 of the fifth example of embodiment are for
(or V or U-shape) as seen from the side, but it is also acceptable to form t to the edge shape of the protrusion 55 In other words, it is acceptable for desired as long as it is a shape that will not come loose when attachin orientation and the edge of the protrusion is fitted into the steps 214a4 and
Next, the sixth example of embodiment will be described while deferrin Figure 56 is a cross-sectional diagram showing the state in which the ink sixth example of embodiment has been inserted into the refill unit 13 Fi diagram showing a summary of the electrical structure of the multifuncti sixth example of embodiment Figure 58 is a flow chart showing the ink ca detection process that is executed by the CPU 971 The sixth example of e additional ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 in relation to device 1 of the first example of embodiment Therefore, the structure cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 of the sixth example of embodi in the first example of embodiment, and therefore, using the same refere items as in the first example of embodiment, the explanation of these will b
As illustrated in Figure 56, in the multifunction device 1 of the embodiment, there is an ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 Whe 14 has been attached to the correct attachment position, the edge of the ca 214a and 224a will press a protruding piece of the ink cartridge attachme 960 and by pressing this protruding piece, the ink cartridge attachment de will send a signal to the control board 970 The control board 970 is a perform the main control of the multifunction device 1
As illustrated in Figure 57, the control board 970 includes a CPU calculation means, a ROM 972 which is the memory that cannot be over stores the control program and the fixed value data, a RAM 973 which is th of ink remaining in the ink cartridge 14, and ink cartridge attachment de that detects whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attached or not, and the in that performs input and output of each type of signal While it is not illust there are also various counters and timers included, the updating of the c timer values will be performed according to the processing performed withi
Within the EEPROM 974, there is an ink cartridge attachment fla cartridge attachment flag 974 will not only go on when the ink cartridge 14 attached, it is a flag that will go off when the ink cartridge 14 has been remo the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a has been turned on, it will remain in is turned off by the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960
The ink cartridge attachment detection process illustrated in Figure 58 process that is executed at the specific intervals (for instance, every 4 ms) a the initial set-up process (not illustrated in the figure) after the power sour on for the multifunction device 1 In the following explanation, the ink ca detection sensor 960 will go on when the protruding piece of the ink ca sensor is pressed, and it will go off when the protruding piece is not remaimng ink detection sensor 57 will go on when the amount of light rec receiving part 57b is below a certain level (when the light path between the 57a and the light receiving part 57b is obstructed), and it will go off when t received by the light receiving part 57b has exceeded a certain level (whe from the light emitting part 57a is received by the light receiving part 57b)
When the ink cartridge attachment detection process is executed, fir whether the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is on or not (Sl cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 is off (SlOl No), then there is n attached to the multifunction device 1, so setting the value of the ink cartrid 974a to be 0 (S 102), the ink cartridge will display onto the liquid crystal d not (S 104) In the event that the ink cartridge 14 is attached from the attached, the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a should be 0 (S this process will confirm whether the remaining ink detection sensor 57 on the timing in which the ink cartridge 14 is attached (S 105) If the remai sensor 57 is off (S 105 No), it means that the ink cartridge 14 which is in t shielding arm part 473c has been removed from between the light emittin light receiving part 57b has been attached, or in other words, the ink cartri remaining has been attached Therefore, ink empty display will be displ crystal display part 35 (S 112), and this process will end On the other hand, within the S 105 process, if the remaining ink detecti
(S 105 Yes), then this process will confirm whether the remaining ink detec been on or not for longer than the specific time (for instance, greater than 1 remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been on for longer than the specific ti means that the remaining ink detection sensor 57 has been already on f specific time at the timing where the ink cartridge 14 is attached, so it is co are impurities attached to the surface of the light emitting part 57a and the l 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 57, where these impurities are o path between these surfaces, or it is considered that the sensor 960 malfu if the S 106 process is Yes, then a remaining ink detection sensor ab displayed on the liquid crystal display part 35 (S 107), and this process will e
Within the S 106 process, if the remaining ink detection sensor 57 ha longer than the specific time (S 106 No), next, this process will determine ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has been on for longer tha (for instance, 10 s) (S 108) As described above, the processing after "S 104 i to be performed in the event that the ink cartridge 14 is attached from the attached, and so if the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 has al f
127
longer than the specific time (S 108 No), when because this means that t has been correctly attached, the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 9 (SIlO), and this process will end In other words, the ink cartridge att sensor 960 and the remaining ink detection sensor 57 will change in appro timing, and when the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set attachment of the ink cartridge 14, it will be set to the state in Which it i using the multifunction device 1
Within the Sl 10 processing, when the ink cartridge attachment flag 974 processing after that, the process of S 104 will go to Yes, and the pro remaining ink within the ink cartridge 14 will be performed In other word process, whether or not the remaining ink detection sensor 57 has become confirmed, and if the remaining ink detection sensor 57 is on (Si ll Yes) within the ink cartridge 14, and this process will end as is, and if the remai sensor 57 is off (Sill No), then an ink empty display will be displayed o display 35 (S 112), and this process will end
When the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is 1 , in other has been detected, the multifunction device 1 will allow execution of the pri illustrated in the figure), and therefore, it is possible to avoid execution of t in the state in which it is unclear whether the ink cartridge 14 has been attac When each of the errors has been displayed, and if there is an abnormal executed, such as an operation of the abnormal deletion button, the ink ca flag 974a will be initialized to 0
As described above, in the sixth example of embodiment, it is not distinguish and detect the unattached state of the ink cartridge 14 and when is also possible to detect any abnormalities in each sensor Also, when cartridge 14, as the ink cartridge attachment detection sensor 960 will be tu detection sensor 960 is already broken, an ink empty display will be disp the ink cartridge 14 is not attached Therefore, it is possible for the user to r has been some sort of abnormal occurrence If an abnormal deletion oper then because the value of the ink cartridge attachment flag 974a is set to 0, i ink cartridge 14 is attached next, then it is possible to display the abno cartridge attachment detection sensor 960, making it possible for this to be user
As in the first example of embodiment, if there is no ink cartridge att sensor 960, it is possible for the remaining ink detection sensor 57 to dete lack of any remaining ink It is also possible for the remaining ink dete detect that the ink cartridge 14 is attached (or more correctly, that an ink enough amount of remaimng ink has been attached), if the remaimng ink d changed from off to on It is acceptable to allow the execution of printing p remaining ink detection sensor 57 detects that the ink cartridge 14 is attache Next, referring to Figure 59, the seventh and eighth examples of e described Figure 59 is an angled view showing the external appearance of 6014 and 7014 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment, Figure view showing the external appearance of the ink cartridge 6014 in the se embodiment, and Figure 59(b) is an angled view showing the external app cartridge 7014 of the eighth example of embodiment The ink cartridges 60 seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are constructed such that the surfaces on which the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 are formed will be d to the ink cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth examples Therefore, the structure other than the side surfaces on which the ink supp 5120 of the seventh and eighth examples of embodiment are formed is th cartridges 4014 and 5014 of the third and fourth examples of embodiment, in which the light emitting part 57a and the light receiving part 57b of detection sensor 57 can be inserted
As illustrated in Figure 59(b), there is a concave part 7100 formed ab part 5120 (above the attached state of the ink cartridge 5120 (the state in Fi is a detection part 7140 formed in the central position of this concave part 7 both sides of the detection part 7140, there is a space formed in which the
57a and the light receiving part 57b of the remaining ink detection sensor 5
Also, the detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the ink cartridges 6014 and 7 and eighth examples of embodiment are arranged within the concave pa formed on the side surfaces, so it is possible to reduce any adherence of from the ink supply parts 4120 and 5120 onto the detection parts 6140 and 7
It is acceptable to construct the surface of the concave parts 6100 an supply parts 4120 and 5120 side as a sloped surface that is sloped in the d supply parts 4120 and 5120 By using this structure, if any ink is adhered parts 6140 and 7140, the ink will not accumulate within the concave par making it possible to reduce any adherence of ink onto the detection parts 6
The detection parts 6140 and 7140 of the seventh and eighth examples o also contain sensor arms inside as in the first example of embodiment By 470, it is possible to accurately detect the amount of ink remaining when 4014 and 5014 are attached into the multifunction device 1
Next, referring to Figure 60, we will explain the ninth example of embo is a diagram showing the ink cartridge 8014 and refill unit 13 of the embodiment The same parts as in the first example of embodiment have t attached and the explanation of these will be omitted Also, while the struc member 65 of the door main body 60 in the ninth example of embodiment in the first example of embodiment, the explanation of this will be omitted contacts the pressing retaining member 61 In the ninth example of embodi of the pushing part 8200a is such that it protrudes from the side surface, bu form it in the opposite concave shape In this case, the pressing retainin constructed such that it protrudes from the door main body 61
Next, referring to Figures 61-63, the tenth example of embodiment Figure 61 is an angled diagram showing the external appearance of the ink the tenth example of embodiment Figure 62 is an exploded perspective vie cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment Figure 63 is a diagr procedure for replacing the ink reservoir element The ink cartridge 14 of t embodiment had a structure in which the ink reservoir element 100 w because it was welded into the first and second case members 210 and 22 this ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment is constructe reservoir element 100 is replaceable Further, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment ha structure as the ink cartridge 14 of the first example of embodiment, and t structure that is different in relation to the ink cartridge 14 of the first exam will be described, and using the same references for the same parts as in th embodiment, the explanation of these will be omitted As illustrated in Figure 61, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example o a seal 9100 attached to the outer surface of the case 200 This seal 9100 is maximum surface 220a and the vertical wall part 220c of the second case m vertical wall part 210c and the maximum surface 210a of the first case me words, the seal 9100 is attached to the side surface opposing the protector edge surface on which the ink supply part 120, the ambient air intake detection part 140 are located) The seal 9100 not only has the model of the there are engagement parts 9200a and 9200b formed which protrude in t second case member 220 (in the Z direction, or in the upwards direction in other hand, withm the vertical wall part 220b of the second case mem engagement holes 9201a and 9201b formed which engage with the edges parts 9200a and 9200b respectively
Therefore, when manufacturing the ink cartridge 9014, first, the ink res is placed within the first case member 210, and fitting the engagement part of the first case member 210 with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b member 920, the first case member 210 and the second case member 220 ar seal 9100 is adhered along the maximum surface 210a and the vertical wa first case member 210 and the maximum surface 220a and the vertical wa second case member 220 Then, by attaching the protector 300, the ink manufactured
The ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of embodiment has underg the first case member 210 and the second case member 220, the adhesio onto the first and second case members 210 and 220, and the fitting of the 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b , Therefor union of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b with the engagement holes it is possible to undo the connection between the first case member 210 a member 220 It is possible to simply perform the undoing of the conne engagement parts 9200a and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and the edge of the engagement parts 9200a and 9200b via the engagement 9201b from the outer side of the vertical wall part 210b on which the case 223 have been formed Also, as illustrated in Figure 63, because one edge surface of the firs members 210 and 220 are connected via the seal 9100, it is possible to per and 9200b and the engagement holes 9201a and 9201b, and when the se 220 is open with respect to the first case member 210, the new ink reserv inserted, and then, the first and second case members 210 and 220 are present tenth example of embodiment, while the ink reservoir element 10 new one, it is also acceptable to use a product in which ink has been re-in reservoir element 100 '
As described above, the ink cartridge 9014 of the tenth example of emb undergo the replacement of the ink reservoir element 100 Also, in embodiment, because detection of the remaining ink (combined with attac the ink cartridge) is performed by the remaining ink detection sensor 57 tha sides of the detection part 140 of the ink reservoir element 100, if an ink c no ink reservoir element 100 contained is attached, then the determination there is no remaimng ink (or that there is no ink cartridge attached) Ther be no printing process performed by the multifunction device 1 in the stat cartridge 9014 with no ink reservoir element 100 contained has been attach reduce the possibility of generating printing problems
Next, referring to Figure 64, the eleventh example of embodiment Figure 64 is a diagram showing the ink reservoir element 9300 of the el embodiment The ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of e within the first and second case members, but we will omit a detaile description of the first and second case members
As illustrated in Figure 64, the ink reservoir element 9300 of the ele embodiment is constructed of a hard part 9301 that is formed through i using a resin material, and a bag element 9302 that has flexibility and whic space to store the ink inside, and which is connected to the hard part 9301 has a detection part (irradiation part) 9303 that is to be placed between the element is formed through a molding using a resin material Therefore improve the yield when manufacturing the ink reservoir element 9300, ma achieve a reduction in manufacturing costs
The ink reservoir element 9300 of the eleventh example of embodime the bag part 9302 which forms the reservoir space to store the ink, and so the bag part 9302 is reduced, the bag part 9302 will shrink according to t when the ink is depleted, the reservoir space will be mostly depleted as w not possible to place a sensor arm (rotating member) to detect the amoun within the bag part 9302 However, the hard part 9301 in the ink reservoir element 9300 is for barrier properties, and because it is placed between the light emitting part receiving part 57b of the remaimng ink detection sensor 57, it will always light that is emitted from the light emitting part 57a Therefore, while it detect the amount of ink remaining within the bag part 9302, it is possible there is an ink reservoir element 9300 contained within the first and seco and therefore, it is possible to prevent any printing processes from being multifunction device 1 while the ink reservoir element 9300 is not contain and second case members
Above, the present invention was described based on the examples o the present invention is not limited to these examples of embodiments, and that it would be possible to make various improvements or modifications does not diverge from the claims of the present invention
Now, referring to Figures 65 to 67, the modified examples of the combi members will be described Figures 65 to 67 are diagrams to explain the cases with differing sizes of outer shape from four case members (where th is different) First, an explanation will be made while referring to Figur in Figure 65(a), case Cl is formed of a case member 120 and a case thickness of the case member 120 is t20 and the thickness of the case which is thicker than the thickness t20 As illustrated in Figure 65 (b), case case member 121 and the case member r22 The thickness of the case me the thickness of the case member r22 is t 22, which is thicker than the thic the difference between the thickness t22 of the case member r22 and the t case member r21 is different than the difference between the thickness t21 o 121 and the thickness t20 of the case member 120
By changing the combination of the case members 121 and r22 which and the case members 120 and r21 which form the case Cl, the case C3 as il 65(c) and the case C4 as illustrated in Figure 65(d) are formed More spec formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and case C4 is member 121 and the case member r21
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form the ca members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scale case Cl, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C4 are formed Also, the size outer shape of cases Cl to C4 are all different, with the relationshi Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with different outer shapes amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120, r21, 121 and r2
In this way, in the manufacture of four types of cases with differing oute four case members requires a further second condition to be added to the ab This second condition is that the difference (t22-t21 ) between the thickness the case member (case member r22) which forms the largest first ink cartri the thickness t21 of one side of the case member (case member r21) that Cl=35 mm, C2=65 mm, C3=50 mm, and C4=50 mm, meaning only cases sizes could be manufactured, and if both the first and second conditio thicknesses would be t20=10 mm, t21=20 mm, and t22=40 mm (t22 - t20=10 mm), and the thicknesses of each of the cases would be C 1=30 C3=50 mm, and C4=40 mm, making it possible to manufacture cases with f Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 66 As illust the case C5 is formed of the case member 120 and the case member r20 the case members 120 and r20 are formed of t20 The case C2 illustrated in same as the case C2 in Figure 65(b), and so the explanation of this will be o By changing the combination of the case members 120 and r20 which and the case members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the case C3 il 66(c) and the case C6 illustrated in Figure 66(d) are formed More specific formed of the case member 120 and the case member r22, and the case C case member 121 and the case member r20 Further, the difference betwee of the case member r20 and the thickness t22 of the case member r22 is difference between the thickness t21 of the case member 121 and the thickn member 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r20 which form the cas members 121 and r22 which form the case C2, the small scale case C5, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C6 are formed Also, the size outer shape of cases C2, C3, C5, and C6 are all different, with
C5<C6<C3<C2 Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with diffe according to the amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120
Next, an explanation will be made while referring to Figure 67 As cas Figure 67(a) is the same as the case Cl illustrated in Figure 65, the explana omitted here As illustrated in Figure 67 (b), the case C7 is formed of the ca of the case member r22 and the thickness t21 of the case member r21 is difference between the thickness t22 of the case member 122 and the thickn member 120, fulfilling both the first and second conditions described above
Therefore, using the four case members 120 and r21 which form the ca members 122 and r22 which form the case C7, the small scale case Cl, the l and the two types of mid-sized cases C3 and C8 are formed Also/ the size outer shape of cases Cl, C3, C7, and C8 are all different, with C1<C3<C8<C7 Therefore, it is possible to form four cases with diff according to the amount of ink to be stored using the four case members 120 As descnbed above, within the case members that form each case, wh the case members that are placed on one side are different than the thick members that are placed on the other side, it is possible to form four cases sizes (different internal capacities) from the four case members
Next, another modified example of the present example of embodiment In the above example of embodiment, by using the elasticity of the first springs 630 and 650 and the first and second ambient air springs 730 an valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720 are urged in the direction of the su the ambient air joint 710 to block the ink flow path K and the ambient contrast, it is also acceptable to use the elasticity of the coil spring mem using either a metal material or a resin mateπal to urge the supply valve a valve in the direction of the supply joint and the ambient air joint to block and the ambient air intake path Also, as long as the coil spring is formed su part of it is conical, then it is also possible to reduce the scale of the ink and the ambient air intake mechanism Also, without using the supply s ambient air slider 740, it is acceptable to construct the first supply spring 6 supply spring 650 and the first ambient air spring 730 and the second amb hook 626 and 726 in the supply valve 620 and the ambient air valve 720, connect the supply (ambient air) slider 640 (740) and the first and second s springs 630 and 650 (730 and 750) as one unit, and to have a constru unified supply (ambient air) slider and the first and second supply (ambie move freely
Also, while the check valve 670 was constructed of the umbrella part part 672, it is acceptable to construct it of only the umbrella part 671 The used to prevent backflow of the ink, and therefore, it is acceptable to cons can block the connection of the first cover through-hole 683 and through-hole 684 of the cover 680 Also, it is acceptable to construct the the second cover through-hole 684
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while the space between t part 614 and the joint contact part 613 of the supply joint 610 was formed form, it is also acceptable to form a groove around the periphery of the jo the supply joint Because any displacement of the joint protruding part w this groove, it is possible to reduce displacement in the insertion direction part as the needle 49 is inserted Further, by increasing the inner diameter part in relation to the inner diameter of the joint protruding part, it is poss transmission of the displacement of the joint protruding part to the joint con Also, in the above example of embodiment, while a film 160 was weld of the first opening 112a and the second opening 112b of the frame part 110, close one opening using the side wall, and to weld the film 160 onto only In this case, the second opening 112b side is closed by the side wall, a construction in which the film 160 is welded to the first opening 112a, it is film 160 on the side wall of the ambient air connection passage 433, ma reduce the formation of a meniscus on the ambient air connection passage was constructed of a nylon layer on the frame part 110 side, but it is also ac water-resistant coating onto this nylon layer By using this type of constru to prevent the formation of a meniscus on the ambient air connection passag
Also, in the above example of embodiment, the ambient air comm forming part 430 was constructed such that it sloped downwards towards t air communicating chamber 432 from the first ambient air communicating because one surface of the ambient air communicating passage 433 is co 160, it is possible to prevent the formation of a meniscus withm communicating passage 433 Therefore, it is acceptable to have a constru ambient air communicating passage forming part 430 does not necessarily and it is acceptable to have a construction in which it is horizontal in the cartridge 14 is attached
Also, in the above example of embodiment, while all of the weldi performed using ultrasonic welding, in the case that it is possible to perfor an adhesive, it is acceptable to make all attachments using an adhesi acceptable to use a different welding method for welding For instance, t case 200 can be substituted with attachment using an adhesive as it is only i that the first and second case members 210 and 220 do not separate Industrial Applicability The ink cartridge, the lnkjet recording apparatus and the combinati present invention are widely used for home and office uses

Claims

1 An ink cartridge having an ink storage chamber for stoπng ink pr ink cartridge being mountable to an inkjet recording apparatus comprising a door disposed on an accommodating chamber defining a space f the ink cartridge and allowing the ink cartridge to be mounted thereto direction through a first opemng and configured to be rotated about the accommodating chamber as an axis of rotation for opening and closing th closing the first opening when it takes an upright posture, and a pressing member provided on the door for pressing a back cartridge inserted into the accommodating chamber by a resilient force, the ink cartridge compπsing an ink supply part provided on a front side surface being defin direction when the ink cartridge is in a mounted posture, which is a pos cartridge is mounted to the accommodating chamber, and having a se allowing entering of an extracting member of the inkjet recording appa mounted to the inkjet recording apparatus, a supply valve mechanism for opening and closing the second o supply part, and a pressed portion provided on a back surface at the rear side direction when the ink cartridge is in the mounting posture and configure the pressing member, the supply valve mechanism comprising a supply valve member for opemng and closing the second openin part and a supply urging member for urging the supply valve member to a d the second opemng of the ink supply part, wherein the urging force of the supply urging member is adapted direction of the back surface when the ink cartridge is in the mounting post
3 The ink cartridge according to Claim 1 or 2, comprising an atmospheric air introducing part having a third opening provid than the ink supply part on the front side surface for introducing atmosphe storage chamber when the ink cartridge is in the mounting posture, and an atmospheric air valve mechanism for opening and closing the t atmospheric air introducing part, wherein the atmospheric air valve mechanism comprises an atm member for opemng and closing the third opemng of the atmospheric air in an atmospheric air urging member for urging the atmospheric air val direction of closing the third opening, and wherein a resultant urging force of the urging force of the supply for urging the supply valve member and the urging force of the atm mechanism for urging the atmospheric air valve member is adapted to b resilient force of the pressing member for pressing the pressed portion
4 The ink cartridge according to Claim 3, wherein the ink su atmosphenc air introducing part are formed so as to project outward fr surface, and wherein when the ink cartridge is mounted to the accommoda pressing member abuts against the pressed portion and the projected ends part and the atmospheric air introducing part abut against a distal end of t chamber
5 The ink cartridge according to Claim 4, comprising an irradiated between the ink supply part and the atmospheric air introducing part on the and configured to be irradiated with emitted light from an optical sensor pro cartridge, a supply valve member for opening and closing the first openin part, and a supply urging member for urging the supply valve member i closing the first opening, said inkjet recording apparatus compπsing an accommodating chamber for defining a space for accommodati and allowing the ink cartridge to be mounted in the horizontal direction opening, / an extracting member which is disposed on a distal end of t accommodating chamber for entering the interior of the ink cartrid accommodating chamber to press the supply valve member to a position fo opening and extracting ink stored in the ink storage chamber, a door disposed on the accommodating chamber and configured t the lower side of the accommodating chamber as an axis of rotation for o the second opening and closing the second opening when it takes an upright a pressing member provided on the door for pressing a back cartridge inserted into the accommodating chamber by a resilient force, wherein the resilient force of the pressing member is adapted to urging force of the supply urging member for urging the supply valve memb
7 The ink cartridge according to any of the preceding claims, w portion is provided at a level lower than the atmosphenc air introducing pa the ink supply part in the vertical direction when the ink cartridge is in the
8 A combination of an ink cartridge according to any of claims 1 to 5 recording apparatus according to claim 6
PCT/JP2006/320033 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof WO2007037548A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN2006800065599A CN101132926B (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 Ink cartridge, ink jet recording equipment and assembly of them

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2005284646A JP4539517B2 (en) 2005-09-29 2005-09-29 ink cartridge
JP2005-284646 2005-09-29
JP2005-342697 2005-11-28
JP2005342697 2005-11-28
JP2005377987 2005-12-28
JP2005-377987 2005-12-28
JP2006-064974 2006-03-09
JP2006064974A JP4400586B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-09 Ink cartridge and ink jet recording apparatus
JP2006081806A JP4479684B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2006-03-23 ink cartridge
JP2006-081806 2006-03-23

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2007037548A1 true WO2007037548A1 (en) 2007-04-05
WO2007037548A9 WO2007037548A9 (en) 2007-05-31

Family

ID=37744560

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2006/320033 WO2007037548A1 (en) 2005-09-29 2006-09-29 Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1772271B1 (en)
AT (1) ATE404373T1 (en)
DE (1) DE602006002212D1 (en)
WO (1) WO2007037548A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8439488B2 (en) 2007-11-28 2013-05-14 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Ink supply device

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7416290B2 (en) 2007-01-30 2008-08-26 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Ink cartridges
JP4880564B2 (en) * 2007-10-18 2012-02-22 株式会社リコー Liquid container and image forming apparatus
JP5293243B2 (en) 2008-03-24 2013-09-18 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid container and manufacturing method thereof
EP2479034A4 (en) 2010-07-15 2015-04-29 Seiko Epson Corp Liquid container, and liquid jet system
CN102815093B (en) * 2010-10-29 2016-01-27 船井电机株式会社 A kind of consumptive material delivery member
US8567932B2 (en) 2010-11-17 2013-10-29 Funai Electric Co., Ltd. Fluid container having fluid interface for micro-fluid applications
US8752941B2 (en) * 2010-11-17 2014-06-17 Funai Electric Company Ltd. Fluid container having latching interface for micro-fluid applications
JP6260196B2 (en) * 2013-10-23 2018-01-17 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid container and liquid ejecting apparatus

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000190516A (en) * 1998-12-24 2000-07-11 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet recorder

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4210034B2 (en) * 1998-03-04 2009-01-14 ヒューレット・パッカード・カンパニー System for renewing ink containers
US6471333B1 (en) 2001-04-30 2002-10-29 Hewlett-Packard Company Method and apparatus for keying ink supply containers
MXPA03002490A (en) * 2002-03-20 2004-10-15 Seiko Epson Corp Ink cartridge and ink cartridge holder.
JP4141873B2 (en) 2003-03-25 2008-08-27 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid container forming member and method for manufacturing liquid container
JP4277276B2 (en) * 2004-01-30 2009-06-10 セイコーエプソン株式会社 Liquid container

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2000190516A (en) * 1998-12-24 2000-07-11 Seiko Epson Corp Ink jet recorder

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8439488B2 (en) 2007-11-28 2013-05-14 Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Ink supply device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2007037548A9 (en) 2007-05-31
ATE404373T1 (en) 2008-08-15
EP1772271A2 (en) 2007-04-11
EP1772271A3 (en) 2007-05-16
DE602006002212D1 (en) 2008-09-25
EP1772271B1 (en) 2008-08-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1772270B1 (en) Ink Cartridge
US7828421B2 (en) Ink cartridge arrangements
US8025376B2 (en) Ink cartridges
WO2007037548A1 (en) Ink cartridge, inkjet recording apparatus and combination thereof
EP1772274B1 (en) Ink cartridge, set of ink cartridges and ink jet recording system
US7810916B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7553007B2 (en) Ink cartridges
EP1772269B1 (en) Ink Cartridge
EP1772272B1 (en) Ink cartridge
EP1772273B2 (en) Ink cartridge
US7682004B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7837311B2 (en) Ink cartridges
US7775645B2 (en) Methods of forming cartridges, such as ink cartridges
EP1772277B1 (en) Ink cartridge
EP1772275B1 (en) Unit of ink cartridges and ink cartridge
EP1772276B1 (en) Ink cartridge with light-receiving and light-blocking portion

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200680006559.9

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 06811360

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1